129647
Abbreviation/Acronym list
2012-priusc Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS A/C ABS ACC ALR CRS DISP ECU EDR ELR EPS EV GAWR GVWR I/M LATCH LED M + S MMT MTBE OBD SRS
MEANING Air Conditioning Anti-lock Brake System Accessory Automatic Locking Retractor Child Restraint System Display Electronic Control Unit Event Data Recorder Emergency Locking Retractor Electric Power Steering Electric Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Ratings Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Emission inspection and maintenance Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children Light Emitting Diode Mud + Snow Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether On Board Diagnostics Supplemental Restraint System
538
Information Provided by:
Abbreviation list
ABBREVIATIONS TIN TPMS TRAC TWI VIN VSC
MEANING Tire Identification Number Tire Pressure Warning System Traction Control Treadwear Indicators Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Stability Control
Information Provided by:
539
For your information
Main Owner's Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice. Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle. This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
16
Information Provided by:
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Cruise control system Anti-lock brake system SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system. High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic shielding. Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
Information Provided by:
17
Vehicle control and operation data recording
Your Toyota is equipped with sophisticated computers that record certain information about your vehicle's operation, such as:
· Engine speed · Electric motor speed (traction motor speed) · Accelerator status · Brake status · Vehicle speed · Shift position The data recorded varies according to the grade level and options the vehicle is equipped with. The computers do not record conversations, sound or pictures.
Data usage Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
· With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
· In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
· For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
18
Information Provided by:
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
· How various systems in your vehicle were operating; · Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened; · How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
· An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
· In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
· For use by Toyota in a law suit However, if necessary, Toyota may:
· Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance · Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Information Provided by:
19
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
General precaution regarding children's safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
20
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Hybrid battery collection
Never resell, handover or modify the hybrid battery. If the hybrid battery is collected improperly and someone touches a high voltage part, there is a risk of electric shock. For safety and to prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Toyota dealers. Do not dispose of the battery yourself.
If the battery is improperly collected the following accidents may occur:
1. The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an electric shock.
2. The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with hybrid vehicles. If the hybrid battery is used outside of its intended purpose (including modifications), accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an explosion and alkaline electrolyte leakage may occur, possibly causing death or serious injury.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is extremely high if the person receiving the vehicle is not aware of these dangers.
Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that can result in death or serious injury.
Information Provided by:
21
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.
Symbols used in illustrations
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
22
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
23
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 Before driving
Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.
2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-ityourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7 For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners.
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
1
Information Provided by:
Prius c
2 0 12
Quick Reference Guide
Information Provided by:
2012 Prius c
This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of basic vehicle operations. It contains brief descriptions of fundamental operations so you can locate and use the vehicle's main equipment quickly and easily. The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as a substitute for the Owner's Manual located in your vehicle's glove box. We strongly encourage you to review the Owner's Manual and supplementary manuals so you will have a better understanding of your vehicle's capabilities and limitations. Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years of satisfied driving in your new Prius c.
A word about safe vehicle operations This Quick Reference Guide is not a full description of Prius c operations. Every Prius c owner should review the Owner's Manual that accompanies this vehicle. Pay special attention to the boxed information highlighted in color throughout the Owner's Manual. Each box contains safe operating instructions to help you avoid injury or equipment malfunction. All information in this Quick Reference Guide is current at the time of printing. Toyota reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Information Provided by:
OVERVIEW
INDEX
OVERVIEW
Engine maintenance Fuel tank door release and cap Hood release Indicator symbols Instrument cluster Instrument panel Keyless entry1 Light control-Instrument panel Smart Key system1,2
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning/Heating Audio Auto lock/unlock1 Clock Cruise control EV-Drive Mode Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) Hybrid Synergy Drive System Lights1 & turn signals Moonroof Multi-Information Display2 Parking brake Power outlets Seat adjustments-Front Seat heaters Seat-Folding down rear seat Seats-Head restraints Steering wheel switches Telephone controls (Bluetooth®) Tilt and telescopic steering wheel Transmission Windows-Power Windshield wipers & washers
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Doors-Child safety locks Door locks Floor mat installation Seat belts Spare tire & tools Star Safety SystemTM Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System
9 8 8 4-5 4 2-3 6 9 7
16 18-19
11 22 20 21 23 10 15 17 22 20 19 13 17 13 12 19 23 21 11 14 14
25 25 27 24 25 26-27 24
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
1 Visit your Toyota dealer for information on customizing this feature. 2 Programmable by customer. Refer to the Owner's Manual for instructions and more information.
Information Provided by:
1
OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel controls
Steering wheel audio controls Voice command button1,2 Steering wheel climate controls Multi-Information Display button "TRIP" button Cruise control1 Ignition switch (standard key)1 Telephone controls1,3 Headlight and turn signal controls/Headlight, turn signal and front fog light controls1 Power button (Smart Key)1 Emergency flasher button Multi-Information Display Audio system or Display Audio system1,2 AUX or USB/AUX port Air Conditioning/Heating controls Outside rearview mirror1/Rear window defogger button 12V DC power outlet
Information Provided by:
2
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Air Conditioning system
Shift lever "ECO MODE" switch Parking brake "EV" switch Seat heater controls1 Wiper and washer controls Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System reset Hood lock release lever Fuel filler door opener Power rearview mirror controls Instrument panel light control 1 If equipped 2 Refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual." 3 For vehicles with a Display Audio System, refer to the "Display Audio System
Owner's Manual."
Information Provided by:
3
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Instrument cluster
Speedometer Transmission shift position indicator Fuel gauge Multi-information display Service indicators and reminders
Indicator symbols
For details, refer to "Indicators and warning lights," Section 2-2, 2012 Owner's Manual.
Brake system warning1 Brake system warning light (yellow indicator)1 Driver seat belt reminder (alarm will sound if speed is over 12 mph) Charging system warning1 Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Low fuel level warning
Airbag SRS warning1 Master warning1 Low Tire Pressure Warning1 Electric power steering system warning1 Immobilizer system indicator
1 If indicator does not turn off within a few seconds of starting hybrid system, there may be a malfunction. Have vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Information Provided by:
4
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Headlight low/high beam indicator Turn signal indicator READY indicator EV Drive Mode indicator Eco Mode indicator EV drive indicator Front fog light indicator Slip indicator/Hill-start Assist Control indicator1
Cruise control indicator2 Anti-lock Brake System warning1
2 If this light flashes, refer to "Cruise control," Section 2-4, 2012 Owner's Manual.
Information Provided by:
5
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
OVERVIEW
Keyless entry
Locking operation
Type A
Type B
Push
Unlocking operation
Type A
Type B
Push ONCE: Driver door TWICE: All doors
NOTE: If a door is not opened within 60 seconds of unlocking, all doors will relock for safety. Panic button
Push and hold
Information Provided by:
6
OVERVIEW
Smart Key system (if equipped)
Start function
Carrying
Depress brake pedal
Push
Power (without starting hybrid system)
Without depressing the brake pedal, pressing the "POWER" switch will change the operation mode in succession from:
ACCESSORY Accessories such as the radio will operate.
ON Power ON; hybrid system is not engaged.
OFF All systems OFF.
Locking operation (if equipped)
Unlocking operation (if equipped)
All-door lock
Driver door unlock*
Touch
Carry remote to lock
Carry remote to unlock
Back door lock/unlock (if equipped)
Grasp
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Carry remote to lock/unlock
Push to unlock Push to lock
* Driver door unlocking function can be programmed to unlock driver door only, or all doors. Grasping passenger door handle will unlock all doors.
NOTE: Doors may also be locked/unlocked using remote.
Information Provided by:
7
OVERVIEW Fuel tank door release and cap
Pull
Turn to open
Store
Hood release
NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is not tightened enough, Check Engine " " indicator may illuminate.
Pull
Pull up latch and raise hood
Engage support rod
Information Provided by:
8
OVERVIEW
Light control-Instrument panel
Brightness control
+
-
Engine maintenance
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Engine oil filler cap Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil level dipstick Windshield washer fluid tank NOTE: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including oil changes, will help
extend the life of your vehicle and maintain performance. Please refer to the "Warranty Maintenance Guide."
Information Provided by:
9
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Hybrid Synergy Drive System
The Hybrid Synergy Drive System utilizes a computer-controlled gasoline engine and electric motor to provide the most efficient combination of power for the vehicle. To conserve energy, when the brakes are applied the braking force generates electricity which is then sent to the traction battery. In addition, the engine shuts off when the vehicle is stopped. The benefits are better fuel economy, reduced vehicle emissions and improved performance. NOTE: Fuel consumption and energy information of the hybrid system are
shown on the multi-information display or the Display Audio System. Tips for improved fuel economy -Ensure tire pressures are maintained at levels specified in the Owner's Manual. -When possible, link trips to reduce engine cold starts. -Avoid driving at speeds that are higher than necessary, especially on the highway. -When possible, avoid sudden stops to maximize regenerative braking energy. -Minimize use of the Air Conditioning. Starting the hybrid system
(1) Put the selector lever in "P." (2) Vehicles with Smart Key system:
Depress the brake pedal, and press the "POWER" switch briefly and firmly. Vehicles without Smart Key system: Depress the brake pedal, and turn the key to the "START" position. (3) The "READY" light will blink. After a few seconds, when the light remains steady and a beep sounds, you may begin driving.
Information Provided by:
10
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Transmission
Park1 Reverse Neutral Drive Engine brake2
1 The "POWER"/ignition switch must be "ON" and the brake pedal depressed to shift from Park.
2 The engine brake is the equivalent of downshifting. Shift to "B" when engine braking is desired (i.e. downhill driving, coasting to a stop, etc.). Eco Mode
Push Eco Mode helps achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating and braking. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more details.
Auto lock/unlock
Automatic door locks can be programmed to operate in two different modes, or turned OFF. -Doors lock when shifting from Park. -Doors lock when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph or higher. -Doors unlock when shifting into Park.
Vehicles without Smart Key system -Doors unlock when the ignition switch is set from "ON" to "ACC" or "LOCK" and driver's door is opened. Vehicles with Smart Key system -Doors unlock when the "POWER" switch is set to OFF and driver's door is opened. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more details.
Information Provided by:
11
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Seats-Head restraints
Front (adjustable type)/Rear center
Rear outboard
Lock release button
Lock release buttons
Information Provided by:
12
Seat adjustments-Front
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Seat position (forward/backward) Height crank (driver side; if equipped) Seatback angle
Seat-Folding down rear seat
Split rear seats
(1) Pull up
Non-split rear seat
(2) Fold down (1) Pull up
(2) Fold down
Information Provided by:
13
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
FEATURES/OPERATIONS Windows-Power
Driver side Up
Down
Window lock switch
Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the switch completely down or pull it completely up and release to fully open or close. To stop window midway, push the switch in the opposite direction.
Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger windows. Driver's window remains operable.
Windshield wipers & washers
Front
Single wipe
Intermittent windshield wiper frequency (if equipped)
Pull to wash and wipe
Rear (if equipped)
Interval wipe Slow Fast
Increase
Decrease
Wash and wipe Wipe
Interval wipe Wash and wipe
Information Provided by:
14
OVERVIEW
Lights & turn signals
Headlights
Headlights Parking lights
DRL OFF
Low beam High beam
High beam flasher
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Daytime Running Light system (DRL) Automatically turns on the headlights at a reduced intensity.
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn
Front fog lights come on only when the headlights are on low beam.
Turn signals
Right turn Lane change
Lane change Left turn
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Information Provided by:
15
FEATURES/ OPERATIONS Air Conditioning/ Heating
Air Conditioning ON/OFF Temperature setting display Fan speed display Air outlet display Windshield defogger Recirculate cabin air (fresh air when OFF) Airflow vent In " " mode, use fresh air (" " indicator OFF) to reduce window fogging. Fan speed control Automatic climate control ON Adjusting the temperature setting will cause the airflow vents, air intake and fan to adjust automatically. Climate control OFF Temperature selector
Information Provided by:
16
OVERVIEW
Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation
Push once to open partway; again to open completely.
Open
Tilting operation
Tilt
Close
Close
Recommended open position to minimize wind noise.
Push once to open; moonroof will automatically stop at the recommended position. Push again to open completely.
Seat heaters (if equipped)
Push Driver seat
Push
Front passenger seat
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Information Provided by:
17
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Audio
Type 1
Eject CD
Push to turn ON/OFF
Seek station/ CD track select
Preset buttons - functions in other modes indicated above button
Push and turn to adjust tone & balance
Type 2*
Station/ CD track select
Mode
View CD text
Eject CD
Touch screen display
Seek station/ CD track select
Push to turn ON/OFF
Push to display audio screen
Turn to tune radio stations manually or select tracks or files
Premium Display Audio system
* Refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual" for instructions and more information.
CD player (Type 1) To scan tracks on a disc Push "SCAN." Push again to hold selection. To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn "TUNE.SCROLL." To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push " " ( ) or " " ( ).
Radio (Type 1) To preset stations Tune in the desired station and hold down a preset button until you hear a beep. Push desired preset button to select. To scan stations Push and hold "SCAN" to scan preset stations. Push again to hold selection.
Information Provided by:
18
iPod®/USB/AUX port
OVERVIEW
iPod®/USB port By connecting a USB-compatible portable audio device or USB memory to the USB port, you can listen to music from the portable audio device or USB memory through the vehicle's speaker system. AUX port By inserting a mini plug into the AUX port, you can listen to music from a portable audio device through the vehicle's speaker system while in AUX mode.
Power outlets
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
The "POWER"/ignition switch must be set at the "ACC" or "ON" position for use.
Steering wheel switches
Audio control
Climate control
Volume control
Temperature selector
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
"MODE"
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode. Push and hold to turn the
a"uvdivo
system "
OFF.
Use to search within the selected audio medium (radio, CD, iPod®, etc.).
Information Provided by:
19
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Cruise control (if equipped)
Turning system ON/OFF
System ON/OFF
Functions
Resume2
Increase speed
Cancel1
Set
Decrease speed
1 The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing the brake pedal. 2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph.
Parking brake
Set Pull
Release (2) Push
(1) Pull slightly
(1) Lower
Information Provided by:
20
OVERVIEW
EV-Drive Mode
Push
EV-Drive Mode allows the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the hybrid battery (traction battery), to be used to drive the vehicle under certain driving conditions.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for more details.
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Lock release lever
Angle
Length
Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length, and return lever. NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle is in motion.
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Information Provided by:
21
FEATURES/OPERATIONS Multi-Information Display
Push "DISP" to scroll through the following information screens: (1) Energy Monitor (2) Drive Information (3) ECO Score (4) 5min Consumption* (5) ECO Savings (6) ECO Savings Record* (7) Past Record* (8) Settings & Screen Off * Factory default is OFF. To activate, access settings through "Settings &
Screen Off." After reaching the desired menu screen (1-7), wait for a moment and the details screen will appear. However, to display the details of "Settings & Screen Off" (8), push and hold the "DISP" button while on that menu screen.
Clock
Refer to the Owner's Manual for details on adjusting time.
Information Provided by:
22
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
Microphone (Type A)
Microphone (Type B)
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Audio unit
Steering wheel telephone switches Volume
End call Start call
Bluetooth® technology allows dialing or receipt of calls without taking hands from the steering wheel or using a cable to connect the telephone and the system. Refer to "Bluetooth® audio/phone," Section 3-3 in the Owner's Manual, for more information about phone connections and compatibility.
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC)
Brake pedal
HAC helps prevent rolling backwards on an incline. To engage, push further down on brake pedal while at a complete stop until a beep sounds and slip indicator illuminates. HAC holds for approximately two seconds after releasing brake pedal. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more details.
Information Provided by:
23
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Seat belts
Take up slack
Too high
Keep as low on hips as possible
If belt is fully extended, then retracted even slightly, it cannot be re-extended beyond that point, unless fully retracted again. This feature is used to help hold child restraint systems securely. To find more information about seat belts, and how to install a child restraint system, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Tire Pressure Monitoring (warning) System
STEP 4
System reset initialization 1. Push and hold " SET" button
until the indicator blinks three times. 2. Wait a few minutes to allow
initialization to complete.
After adjusting tire pressures, or after tires have been rotated or replaced, turn the "POWER"/ignition switch "ON" and press and hold the " SET" button until indicator blinks three times. Let the vehicle sit for a few minutes to allow initialization to complete. Refer to the load label on the door jamb or the Owner's Manual for tire inflation specifications. If the tire pressure indicator flashes for more than 60 seconds and then remains on, take the vehicle to your local Toyota dealer. NOTE: The warning light may come on due to temperature changes or changes in tire pressure from natural air leakage. If the system has not been initialized recently, setting the tire pressures to factory specifications should turn off the light.
Information Provided by:
24
OVERVIEW
Door locks
Unlock
Lock
Doors-Child safety locks
Rear door
Lock
Moving the lever to the lock position will allow the door to be opened only from the outside.
Spare tire & tools
Tool location
Luggage floor cover
Jack
Spare tire
* Jack handle, wheel nut wrench and towing eyelet Removing the spare tire
Spare wheel cushions Tool bag*
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Refer to the Owner's Manual for tire changing InformationProvidedby: and jack positioning procedures. 25
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Star Safety SystemTM
All new Toyota vehicles come standard with the Star Safety SystemTM, which combines Vehicle Stability Control (VSC), Traction Control (TRAC), Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD), Brake Assist (BA) and Smart Stop Technology (SST).
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) VSC helps prevent loss of traction during cornering by reducing engine power and applying brake force to selected wheels.
Toyota's VSC monitors steering angle and the direction your vehicle is traveling. When it senses that the front or rear wheels begin to lose traction, VSC reduces engine power and applies braking to selected wheels. This helps restore traction and vehicle control.
Traction Control (TRAC) VSC helps prevent loss of traction during cornering by reducing engine power, and Traction Control helps maintain traction on loose gravel and wet, icy, or uneven surfaces by applying brake force to the spinning wheel(s).
Toyota's TRAC sensors are activated when one of the drive wheels starts to slip. TRAC limits engine output and applies the brakes to the spinning wheel. This transfers power to the wheels that still have traction to help you drive safely.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ABS helps prevent brakes from locking up by "pulsing" brake pressure to each wheel. This limits brake lockup and provides the maximum brake effectiveness for the current road conditions.
Toyota's ABS sensors detect which wheels are locking up and limits wheel lockup by "pulsing" each wheel's brakes independently. Pulsing releases brake pressure repeatedly for fractions of a second. This helps the tires attain the maximum traction that the current road conditions will allow, helping you stay in control.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Toyota's ABS technology has Electronic Brake-force Distribution (EBD) to help maintain stability and balance when braking. Abrupt stops cause the vehicle to tilt forward, reducing the braking power of the rear wheels. EBD responds to sudden stops by redistributing brake force to maximize the braking effectiveness of all four wheels.
Brake Assist (BA) Brake Assist is designed to detect sudden or "panic" braking, and then add braking pressure to decrease the vehicle's stopping distance. When there's only a split second to react, Brake Assist can add additional brake pressure more quickly than just the driver alone can.
Information Provided by:
26
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Smart Stop Technology (SST) Smart Stop Technology automatically reduces engine power when the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed simultaneously under certain conditions. SST engages when the accelerator is depressed first and the brakes are applied firmly for longer than one-half second at speeds greater than five miles per hour. SST doesn't engage if the brake pedal is depressed before the accelerator pedal, allowing vehicles to start on a steep hill and safely accelerate without rolling backward.
Floor mat installation
There are two types of Toyota floor mats: carpeted and all-weather. Each vehicle has model-specific floor mats. Installation is easy. For safety, follow these steps: · Only use floor mats designed for your specific model. · Use only one floor mat at a time, using the retaining hooks to keep the mat in
place. · Install floor mats right side up.
Information Provided by:
27
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
NOTES
Information Provided by:
28
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
InformationProvidedby:
29
Customer Experience Center 1-800-331-4331
Printed in U.S.A. 1/12 11-TCS-05109
Information Provided by:
00505-QRG12-PRIC
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the characteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care. The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.
Gasoline engine Electric motor (Traction motor)
24
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
When stopped/during start off The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During start-off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine 1 is stopped* and the motor is used.
*: However, when the hybrid battery (traction battery) needs to be charged or while the engine is being warmed up, the gasoline engine may not stop automatically. (P. 26)
During normal driving The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery as necessary.
When accelerating sharply The power of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine via the electric motor (traction motor).
When braking (regenerative braking) The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery).
Vehicle Proximity Notification System
When the gasoline engine is off while driving, a sound is produced to warn pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area that the vehicle is approaching. The pitch of the sound adjusts according to vehicle speed. When vehicle speed is approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or more, the warning system turns off.
Information Provided by:
25
1-1. Hybrid system
Regenerative braking In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid battery (traction battery). The accelerator pedal is released. The brake pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or B.
EV drive indicator lamp
The EV drive indicator lamp comes on when driving the vehicle using only the electric motor (traction motor).
Displayed when "ECO Score" or the basic display of "ECO Savings" is selected. (P. 189)
Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop automatically in the following conditions: During gasoline engine warm-up During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low When the heater is switched on
26
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery) As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at least once every 1 few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer. If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or B to avoid discharging the battery.
Charging the 12-volt battery P. 477
After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota dealer.
Information Provided by:
27
1-1. Hybrid system
Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift lever to P when parked. The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating and are not a malfunction: Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment. Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear seats when the hybrid system starts or stops. Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the back door is open. Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling. Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply. Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is depressed. Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops. Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent on the side of the lower part of the rear left seat.
Vehicle Proximity Notification System In the following cases, the Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound may be difficult for pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area to hear: When there is a lot of noise in the vicinity When it is raining or during strong winds When in the area surrounding the rear of the vehicle, rather than in front of the vehicle
Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
28
Information Provided by:
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high
voltage system (about 520 V at maximum) as well as parts that
become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
1
Before driving
Caution label Service plug Air conditioning compressor Electric motor (traction motor)
Power control unit with DC/ DC converter Hybrid battery (traction battery) High voltage cables (orange)
Information Provided by:
29
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid battery air vent
There is an air intake vent on the side of the lower part of the rear left seat for the purpose of cooling the hybrid battery (traction battery). If the vent becomes blocked, the hybrid battery may overheat, leading to a reduction in hybrid battery output.
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions. (P. 441)
30
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12volt battery has been disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If
the "READY" indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
1
Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light (P. 433) stop flashing. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning light stop flashing is about 1.3 gal. [5.0 L, 1.1 Imp. gal.] when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
Electromagnetic waves
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio parts.
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and driving conditions.
Information Provided by:
31
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
High voltage and high temperature precautions The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury. Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or their connectors. The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
Never try to open the service plug access hole located under the rear seat. The service plug is used only when the vehicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.
32
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
Road accident cautions
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
1
Stop the vehicle in a safe place to prevent subsequent accidents, shift the shift lever to P, apply the parking brake, and turn the hybrid system off. (P. 148)
Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables or connectors. Carefully check to see if there are exposed high voltage parts or cables.
If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small amount of water may be dangerous.
If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with the front wheels raised. If the wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause a fire. (P. 425)
Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as soon as possible and contact your Toyota dealer.
Nickel-metal hydride battery
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
Information Provided by:
33
1-1. Hybrid system
NOTICE
Hybrid battery air vent Do not place foreign objects over or in front of the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction battery) may overheat and be damaged. Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from overheating. Do not wet the air vent as this may cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery). Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be damaged.
34
Information Provided by:
1-1. Hybrid system
Energy monitor/consumption screen
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the multi-information display and Display Audio system.
Display Audio system (if
equipped)
1
Multi-information display
Before driving
Energy monitor
Display Audio system (if equipped) Press "CAR".
If the "Trip Information" is displayed, touch "Energy".
Multi-information display
Push the "DISP" switch on the steering wheel several times to select the energy monitor display.
Information Provided by:
35
1-1. Hybrid system
When the vehicle is powered by the electric motor (traction motor)
Display Audio system
When the vehicle is powered by the gasoline engine
When the vehicle is powered by both the gasoline engine and the electric motor (traction motor)
Multi-information display
When the vehicle is charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
When there is no energy flow
36
Information Provided by:
1-1. Hybrid system
Display Audio system
Multi-information display
Hybrid battery
(traction bat-
tery) status
Low
Full Low
1
Full
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
37
1-1. Hybrid system
Trip Information screen (Display Audio system)
Press "CAR". (P. 35)
If the "Energy Monitor" screen is displayed, touch "Trip Information".
Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes Displays the average vehicle speed since the hybrid system was started. Displays the driving time since the hybrid system was started. Cruising range Regenerated energy in the past 15 minutes One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 5 symbols are shown.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
38
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
Fuel consumption screen (Multi-information display)
There are 2 menu items available for the fuel consumption screen.
After pressing the "DISP" switch, select one of the menu items below
and the system will change to the details screen.
1
The "5min Consumption", "Past Record" and "ECO Savings Record" (P. 194) screens are set to off (initialized settings) at the time of shipping. (P. 41)
"5min Consumption" screen
Displays the fuel consumption history since the hybrid system was started in intervals of 5 minutes. Current fuel consumption is simultaneously displayed, enabling it to be compared with fuel consumption of up to the last 30 minutes.
Information Provided by:
39
1-1. Hybrid system
"Past Record"
There are 2 types of displays for the past record. Personal best and monthly average can be changed between on the settings screen. (P. 41)
Personal Best Displays the best 3 fuel consumption records and the current fuel consumption ranking.
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the displayed contents differ.
When the odometer is displayed: the record since the hybrid system was started is displayed.
When the trip meter is displayed: the record since the trip meter was reset is displayed. The record for trip meter A and trip meter B is displayed separately.
The top 100 rankings are displayed. Records that are outside the top 100 are not displayed as a ranking.
Monthly Average Displays average fuel consumption by the month.
The current month, the last 3 months and the same month last year are displayed, enabling a comparison to be made.
The past record can be reset on the settings screen. (P. 41)
40
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-1. Hybrid system
Remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge display The charge amount of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is automatically controlled by the hybrid system. For this reason, even if electricity is recovered via the regenerative braking, or electricity is generated via the gasoline 1 engine, the displayed hybrid battery (traction battery) charge amount may not reach the highest level (level 8). However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
Resetting the consumption data (Display Audio System) Selecting "Clear" on the "Trip Information" screen will reset the fuel consumption and the regenerated energy for the past 15 minutes. Selecting "Yes" on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.
Menu screen selection (Multi-information display)
Press the "DISP" switch and select "Settings & Screen Off". Press and hold the "DISP" switch while the cursor is on "Menu Screen Selection" to change to the settings screen. The following screen changes and settings can be performed: · The eco savings record screen can be
switched on or off. (P. 185) · The 5 minute fuel consumption screen
can be switched on or off. · Past record can be reset. · The past record screen can be
switched between off, monthly average and personal best.
Information Provided by:
41
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following points:
Using Eco drive mode
P. 174
Use of Hybrid System Indicator
By keeping Hybrid System Indicator within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving may be possible. (P. 195)
When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption. In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioning and reduce fuel consumption as well. In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.
42
Information Provided by:
1-1. Hybrid system
Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
1
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate
for the season.
Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause poor fuel consumption.
Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
43
1-2. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system (vehicles without immobilizer system)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 61)
Valet key Key number plate
Vehicles without a smart key system (vehicles with immobilizer system)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 61)
Valet key Key number plate
Vehicles with a smart key system
Electronic keys
· Operating the smart key system (P. 47)
· Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 61)
Mechanical keys Key number plate
44
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-2. Key information
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)
To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever and take
1
the key out.
The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it. After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 473)
Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key (without a smart key system) or mechanical key (with a smart key system) is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (P. 472)
When riding in an aircraft When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
Information Provided by:
45
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
To prevent key damage Observe the following: Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time. Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials. Do not disassemble the keys. Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key. Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key system) Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems (vehicles with a smart key system) Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
When a vehicle key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system) If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.
46
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
1
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
Unlocks and locks the side doors (P. 48) Unlocks and locks the back door (P. 49) Starts the hybrid system (P. 162)
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
47
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door.* (Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock all doors.)
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle. The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked. *: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 53)
Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.
48
Information Provided by:
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the back door Press the button to unlock the back door.
1
The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.
Press the button to lock the back door.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
49
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
Antenna location
Antennas inside the cabin Antennas outside the cabin Antenna outside the luggage compartment
50
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected) When locking or unlocking the doors
1
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
When starting the hybrid system or changing "POWER" switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Information Provided by:
51
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.
Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display is used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 441)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds
Interior alarm sounds continuously
Situation
An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.
The "POWER" switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was opened when the "POWER" switch was in ACCESSORY mode.)
Correction procedure Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Turn the "POWER" switch off and close the driver's door.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (However, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, vehicle may be unlocked.)
52
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.
STEP 1 Turn the "POWER" switch off.
1
STEP 2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and
hold
or
for about 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
Unlocking doors
Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.
Holding the front passenger's door handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding either front door handle unlocks all the doors.
Beep
Exterior: Beeps 3 times Interior: Beeps once
Exterior: Beeps twice Interior: Beeps once
Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.
· The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
· The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer. If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any of the doors except the driver's door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
Information Provided by:
53
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Electronic key battery-saving function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press
twice while pressing and
holding
. Confirm that the electronic
key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.
54
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and
immobilizer system from operating properly.
1
(Ways of coping: P. 473)
When the electronic key battery is depleted
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
· Cards to which aluminum foil is attached · Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside · Metallic wallets or bags · Coins · Hand warmers made of metal · Media such as CDs and DVDs
When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves
· A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
· Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
· Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) · Digital audio players · Portable game systems
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices
Information Provided by:
55
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Notes for the entry function
Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
· The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
· The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or "POWER" switch modes are changed.
Do not exit the vehicle with the electronic key placed on the instrument panel or near the door pockets. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.
Whether or not the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the hybrid system could be started if the electronic key is near the window.
The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
The lock and unlock sensors may not work properly if they come into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the sensors and attempt to operate them again.
If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Using the wireless remote control to unlock the doors may resume the function.)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
· Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
· Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P. 54)
56
Information Provided by:
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Notes for locking the doors
Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni- 1 tion signals will be given.
If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
Notes for the unlocking function
A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle again.
If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.
To operate the smart key system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
If the smart key system does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 473)
Starting the hybrid system: P. 474
Information Provided by:
57
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Electronic key battery depletion The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system stops. (P. 449) As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 397) · The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate. · The detection area becomes smaller. · The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on. To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: · TVs · Personal computers · Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers · Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones · Glass top ranges · Table lamps
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 397
If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 61, 473) Starting the hybrid system and changing "POWER" switch modes: P. 474 Stopping the hybrid system: P. 474
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e. g. operation signals) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 516)
58
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Certification for the smart key system
U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAB
FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
1
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-7
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Information Provided by:
59
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
Caution regarding interference with electronic devices People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 50) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function. Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices. Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
60
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system
Locks all the doors
1
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Sounds the alarm (press and hold)
Vehicles with a smart key system
Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Sounds the alarm (press and hold)
Operation signals
Vehicles without a smart key system The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/ unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Vehicles with a smart key system A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Information Provided by:
61
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Panic mode Vehicles without a smart key system
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the wireless remote control.
Vehicles with a smart key system
When
is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.
Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart key system)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
62
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
When the wireless key battery is depleted
1
Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device
When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
When other wireless keys (that emits radio waves) are being used nearby
If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 55
If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 473)
Key battery depletion
Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 397)
Vehicles with a smart key system
P. 58
When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 397
Information Provided by:
63
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart key system) The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 516)
Certification for wireless remote control U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAC FCC ID: HYQ12BDM NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada NOTE: Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
64
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
Entry function (if equipped)
P. 47
1
Wireless remote control P. 61
Key Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Vehicles without a smart key system Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors
Driver's side only: Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.
Vehicles with a smart key system The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 473)
Door lock switch Locks all the doors Unlocks all the doors
Information Provided by:
65
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Inside lock buttons
Locks the door Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
STEP 1 Move the inside door lock button to the lock position. STEP 2 Close the door.
Vehicles without a smart key system The door cannot be locked if either of the front doors is open and the key is in the engine switch.
Vehicles with a smart key system The door cannot be locked if the "POWER" switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
66
Information Provided by:
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock
1
is set. Unlock Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
67
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems The following functions can be set or canceled:
Function
Operation
Shift position linked door locking function
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Speed linked door locking function (vehicles with a smart key system)
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function (vehicles without a smart key system)
Driver's door linked door unlocking function (vehicles with a smart key system)
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 45 seconds after turning the engine switch to "ACC" or "LOCK".
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 45 seconds after turning the "POWER" switch off.
Setting and canceling the functions To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system Close all the doors and turn the engine switch to the "ON" position. (Perform STEP 2 within 20 seconds.)
Vehicles with a smart key system Close all the doors and switch the "POWER" switch to ON mode. (Perform STEP 2 within 20 seconds.)
68
Information Provided by:
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
STEP 2
Function Shift position linked door locking function Shift position linked door unlocking function Speed linked door locking function Driver's door linked door unlocking function
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and press and hold the door lock switch ( or ) for about 5 seconds then release.
1
The shift position corresponding to the desired function to be set are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to cancel the function.
Shift position
Door lock switch position
P
N
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system) The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 473)
If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a smart key system) The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 516)
Information Provided by:
69
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. Always use a seat belt. Always lock all the doors. Ensure that all the doors are properly closed. Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving. The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehicle and it may result in serious injury or death. Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position. Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
70
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Back door
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following procedures.
Locking and unlocking the back door
1
Wireless remote control P. 61
Door lock switches P. 65
Entry function (if equipped) P. 47
Opening the back door from outside the vehicle Raise the back door while pushing up the back door opener switch.
The back door cannot be closed immediately after the back door opener switch is pushed.
Information Provided by:
71
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the back door handle, and make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.
CAUTION
Caution while driving
Keep the back door closed while driving. If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.
Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
72
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
1
Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment. If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion.
Do not allow a child to open or close the back door. Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.
Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to fall closed again after it is opened.
When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.
Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
Information Provided by:
73
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
The back door may fall if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.
When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.
Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay. Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, causing an accident.
If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may fall closed again after being opened, causing someone's hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.
74
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
NOTICE
Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
1
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.
Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.
Information Provided by:
75
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever (if equipped)
CAUTION
Seat adjustment
Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
76
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.
Folding down the rear seatbacks
1
Before folding down the rear seatbacks
STEP 1
Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown.
STEP 2 Stow the seat belts. Center P. 86 Outside
Use the seat belt hangers to prevent the belts from being tangled.
Information Provided by:
77
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 3 Remove the outside head restraints. (P. 81) STEP 4 Lower the center head restraint to the lowest position.
(P. 81)
Folding down rear seatbacks
Vehicles with a split rear seats
Pull the seatback lock release knob and fold the seatback down.
Each seatback may be folded separately.
Vehicles with a non-split rear seat
Pull both seatback lock release knobs at the same time and fold the seatback down.
78
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
When folding the rear seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
1
Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.
Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
For vehicles with split rear seats, do not allow anyone sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.
Be careful not to catch your hand when folding the rear seatbacks.
If it is necessary to detach the head restraints, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Adjust the position of the front seat before folding down the rear seatbacks so that the front seat does not interfere with the rear seatbacks when folding down the rear seatbacks.
Information Provided by:
79
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
After returning the rear seatback to the upright position Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Make sure that the seatback is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red marking will be visible on the seatback lock release knob. Make sure that the red marking is not visible.
Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
Stowing the seat belts The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks.
80
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vehicles with adjustable type head restraints Up
1
Pull the head restraint up.
Down
Lock release button
Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.
Removing the head restraints Front adjustable and rear center head restraints
Pull the head restraint up while pushing the lock release button.
Lock release button
Rear outside head restraints
STEP 1
Pull the seatback lock release knob and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where the head restraints can be removed.
Information Provided by:
81
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 2
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.
Lock release buttons
Installing the head restraints
Front adjustable and rear center head restraints
Align the head restraint with installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Lock release button
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
Rear outside head restraints
STEP 1
Pull the lock release knob and fold down the seatback until it reaches the position where the head restraints can be installed.
STEP 2 Lock release button
Align the head restraint with installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.
82
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of the head restraints (vehicles with adjustable type head restraints) Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. 1
Adjusting the rear center seat head restraints Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
Head restraint precautions (vehicles with adjustable type head restraints) Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position. Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Information Provided by:
83
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt. Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard. To release the seat belt, press the release button.
Release button
84
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear center seat belt
Fastening the seat belt
The rear center seat belt is a 3-point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched 1 for proper operation.
STEP 1 B
Push the tabs back all the way into the cover and then remove the tabs.
STEP 2 B
A
Push tab "B" into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
A
Push tab "A" into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
Information Provided by:
85
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Releasing the seat belt Release the rear center seat belt only when necessary, such as when folding down the rear seat. For safety, always store the plate in the designated place after releasing it.
STEP 1 B
To release tab "A", press the release button.
To release tab "B", insert the key (P. 44) or tab "A" into the hole on the buckle.
Retract the belt slowly when releasing and stowing the seat belt.
A
B
A
86
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
STEP 2 B
A
Holding tab "A" and "B" together, insert both tabs all the way into the cover on the roof.
1
STEP 3
A
B
With tab "B" inserted all the way into the cover, move tab "A" slightly back toward the cover's inlet, so that it blocks the inlet.
Information Provided by:
87
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact, a rear impact or a vehicle rollover.
Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.
Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 138)
Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 134) When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 84 regarding seat belt usage.
88
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
Seat belt extender
1
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Wearing a seat belt
Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. Always wear a seat belt properly. Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children. Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
Information Provided by:
89
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 84)
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 84)
When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
Seat belt pretensioners
Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.
90
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Seat belt damage and wear
Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
1
Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
When using or storing the rear center seat belt
Do not use the rear center seat belt with either buckle released.
Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.
For vehicles with split rear seats, do not allow anyone sit on the rear center seat if the rear right seat is folded down, as the seat belt buckle for the rear center seat belt is then concealed under the folded seat and cannot be used.
When storing the rear center seat belt, ensure that the tabs are securely inserted into the cover on the roof. If the tabs are not stowed properly, they may drop from the cover while driving, resulting in serious injury.
Information Provided by:
91
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Using a seat belt extender Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender. Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
NOTICE
When using a seat belt extender When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
92
Information Provided by:
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
STEP 1
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
1
Before driving
STEP 2
Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
Information Provided by:
93
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating posture.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.
Normal position Anti-glare position
94
Information Provided by:
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, 1 resulting in death or serious injury.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
95
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
STEP 1
To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.
Left Right
STEP 2
Folding the mirrors
To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
Up Right Down Left
Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.
96
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
1
The "POWER" switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 245)
CAUTION
When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. Do not drive with the mirrors folded. Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
When a mirror is moving To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.
When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with an outside rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
Information Provided by:
97
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing One-touch closing (driver's window only)* Opening One-touch opening (driver's window only)*
*: Pushing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop window travel partway.
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
: If equipped
98
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system
1
The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
Vehicles without a smart key system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles with a smart key system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the "POWER" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function (driver's window only)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
When the power window does not close normally (driver's window only)
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the driver's door.
Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode.
If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
Information Provided by:
99
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
STEP 1 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.
STEP 2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened completely.
STEP 3 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated. Do not allow children to operate the power windows. Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.
Jam protection function (driver's window only) Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.
100
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.
Opening and closing
1
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.
Closes the moon roof*
Tilting up and down
*: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilts the moon roof up* Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either of the moon roof switches to stop the moon roof partway.
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
101
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
The moon roof can be operated when The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the "POWER" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Jam protection function If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
Sunshade The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
102
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle.
1
STEP 2 Press and hold the "CLOSE" switch.*1
The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle. STEP 2 Press and hold the "TILT" switch*1 until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
STEP 3 Release the "TILT" switch once and then press and hold the "TILT" switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2 Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
STEP 4 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the "CLOSE" or "TILT" switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Information Provided by:
103
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof open reminder function An alarm will sound and a message is shown on the multi-information display when the driver's door is opened with the moon roof not fully closed and the "POWER" switch off.
CAUTION
Opening the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving. Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Jam protection function Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.
104
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles without a smart key system
1
Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Turn the "POWER" switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.
Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 107)
Opening the fuel tank cap
STEP 1
Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.
STEP 2
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.
Information Provided by:
105
1-6. Refueling STEP 3
Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.
106
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-6. Refueling
Fuel types
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
1
DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).
Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a suitable Research Octane Number as outlined in "Fuel types".
Information Provided by:
107
1-6. Refueling
CAUTION
When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.
Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
Do not top off the fuel tank
When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
108
Information Provided by:
1-6. Refueling
NOTICE
Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control 1 system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.
Before driving
Information Provided by:
109
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles without a smart key system
The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.
Vehicles with a smart key system The indicator light flashes after the "POWER" switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the "POWER" switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.
110
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Before driving
System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
Conditions affecting operation
1
Depending on the surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from starting. (P. 55) Certifications for the immobilizer system U.S.A. FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3 FCC ID: MOZRI-33BTY This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
Certifications for the immobilizer system Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
Information Provided by:
111
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels
These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.
112
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 76)
1
Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 76) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable. (P. 76) Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest. (P. 93) Vehicles with adjustable type head restraints: Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 81) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 84)
Information Provided by:
113
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
While driving Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat. Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback. A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger. Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
Adjusting the seat position Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat. Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
114
Information Provided by:
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
1
Before driving
SRS front airbags SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components. SRS driver knee airbag Can help provide driver protection.
Information Provided by:
115
1-8. Safety information
SRS side and curtain shield airbags SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants. SRS curtain shield airbags Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats.
Other SRS airbags SRS seat cushion airbags Can help restrain the driver and front passenger.
116
Information Provided by:
SRS airbag system components
1-8. Safety information 1
Before driving
Curtain shield airbags SRS warning light and "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights Side airbags Side impact sensors (rear) Front passenger's seat cushion airbag Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch Driver airbag Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Driver's seat cushion airbag Side impact sensors (front) Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters Side impact sensors (front door) Driver's knee airbag Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors) Airbag sensor assembly Front impact sensors Front passenger airbag
Information Provided by:
117
1-8. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
118
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
1
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
The windshield may crack.
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
· If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sigh pole, which can move or deform on impact
· If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle "underrides", or goes under, the bed of a truck
Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.
The SRS front airbags and seat cushion airbag for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags and seat cushion airbag for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
The SRS seat cushion airbags on the front seats will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
Information Provided by:
119
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]). The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
Falling into or jumping over a deep hole Landing hard or falling
120
Information Provided by:
1-8. Safety information
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags) The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any 1 type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may occur. Collision from the side Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover
Before driving
Information Provided by:
121
1-8. Safety information
Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags) The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
Collision from the front* Collision from the rear Vehicle rollover *: Depending on the conditions and type
of accident, the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.
When to contact your Toyota dealer In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags to inflate.
122
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and cur-
tain shield airbags to inflate.
1
The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The front seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
Information Provided by:
123
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts. The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
· Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
· Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
· If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
124
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
If the seat belt extender has been con- 1 nected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 134)
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
Information Provided by:
125
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.
Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and driver knee airbags deploy.
126
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions
Do not attach anything to areas such as 1 a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
Vehicles without a smart key system: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys and accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the SRS driver knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver's seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS driver knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags and seat cushion airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags and seat cushion airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
Information Provided by:
127
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
SRS airbag precautions If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer. Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags. Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails. Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment. Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo bar etc.). Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system. Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players. Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
128
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
1
SRS warning light "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light "AIR BAG ON" indicator light Seat belt reminder light
Information Provided by:
129
1-8. Safety information
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Adult*1
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
"AIR BAG ON"
Indicator/ warning light
SRS warning light Seat belt reminder light
Off
Off*2 or
flashing*3
Front passenger airbag
Devices
Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Activated*2 or
deactivated*3
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Activated
Child*4 or child restraint system*5
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
Indicator/ warning light
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger
side Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
"AIR BAG OFF"*6 Off Off*2 or
flashing*3 Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
130
Information Provided by:
1-8. Safety information
Before driving
Unoccupied
Indicator/ warning light
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light Seat belt reminder light
"AIR BAG OFF"
Off
1
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Devices
Side airbag on the front passenger seat Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
side
Activated
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side
Deactivated
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner Activated
There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/ warning light
"AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
SRS warning light
Seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger
Devices
side
Seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner
"AIR BAG OFF" On
Deactivated
Activated
Deactivated Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.
*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*4: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Information Provided by:
131
1-8. Safety information
*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 134)
*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 138)
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Wear the seat belt properly. Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat. Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment. (e.g. seatback pocket) Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat. Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs. Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
132
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, 1 which indicates that the passenger's airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system. If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward. When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (P. 138) Do not modify or remove the front seats. Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks. Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface. Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
Information Provided by:
133
1-8. Safety information
Child restraint systems
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat. Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child. For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 138)
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child: Rear facing -- Infant seat/convertible seat
134
Information Provided by:
Before driving
Forward facing -- Convertible seat
1-8. Safety information 1
Booster seat
Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.
If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 84)
Information Provided by:
135
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag and seat cushion airbag in the front passenger side could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
136
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
Child restraint precautions Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side 1 rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child. Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.
When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
When the child restraint system is not in use Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment. If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.
Information Provided by:
137
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint. The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver's seat belt) (P. 84)
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat.
138
Information Provided by:
Before driving
1-8. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Type A
STEP 1 Widen the gap in the seat cushion slightly.
1
STEP 2
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
Canada only
Information Provided by:
139
1-8. Safety information
Type B STEP 1 Widen the gap in the seat cushion slightly.
STEP 2
Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
Canada only
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
STEP 1
Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
140
Information Provided by:
Before driving
STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4
1-8. Safety information
Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
1
Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
Information Provided by:
141
1-8. Safety information
Forward facing Convertible seat
STEP 1 Rear center seat: Adjust the head restraint to the upmost position. (P. 81)
STEP 2
Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
STEP 3 STEP 4
Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
142
Information Provided by:
1-8. Safety information
STEP 5
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
1
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
STEP 6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 144)
Booster seat
STEP 1
Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
Before driving
STEP 2
Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 84)
Information Provided by:
143
1-8. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
STEP 1 Remove the luggage cover (if equipped). (P. 339) STEP 2 Remove the head restraint (P. 81) STEP 3 Secure the child restraint system using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt.
STEP 4
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.
STEP 5 Reinstall the luggage cover (if equipped) and the head restraint.
Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE J1819.
144
Information Provided by:
1-8. Safety information
Before driving
CAUTION
When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause 1 injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 88)
When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the righthand rear seat.
Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).
When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
Information Provided by:
145
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed. After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. When a child restraint system with a top tether strap is installed, do not install the head restraint. The head restraint may interfere with the top tether strap preventing secure installation of the child restraint system. Make sure to properly store the removed head restraint in a secure place when you use the child restraint system on the rear seat.
When using the right side seat for the child restraint system, do not sit in the center seat. Seat belt function may be impaired, such as being positioned overly high or loose-fitting, which may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Do not use a seat belt extender If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
146
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the hybrid system P. 158, 162
Driving STEP 1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 173) STEP 2 Release the parking brake. (P. 177) STEP 3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. Stopping STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P. (P. 173)
Parking the vehicle STEP 1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 173) STEP 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 177) STEP 4 Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position to stop the hybrid system. Vehicles with a smart key system Press the "POWER" switch to stop the hybrid system. STEP 5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
148
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
When driving
Starting off on a steep uphill
STEP 1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
STEP 2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal. STEP 3 Release the parking brake.
When starting off on a uphill
2
The hill-start assist control is available. (P. 222)
Driving in the rain
Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
When the accelerator pedal is released
Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
For the first 200 miles (300 km): Avoid sudden stops.
For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
· Do not drive at extremely high speeds. · Avoid sudden acceleration. · Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
Information Provided by:
149
2-1. Driving procedures
Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 492)
For efficient use Shift the shift lever to D when driving. In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine power to recharge. Drive your vehicle smoothly. Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without having to use gasoline engine power. Avoid repeated acceleration. Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator pedal slightly released. Shift the shift lever to P when parking. In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge. Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may discharge the hybrid battery. The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid battery is discharged.
150
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
When driving
CAUTION
When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
When driving the vehicle
Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
2
· Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
· When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
· Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
· Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle's movement.
Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Information Provided by:
151
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system disengaged.
During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 486
Use engine braking (shift position B) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 174)
Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting in death or serious injury.
Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has highspeed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
152
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When driving on slippery road surfaces Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent 2 the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
When shifting the shift lever Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators) Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
When driving
Information Provided by:
153
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When the vehicle is stopped Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident. Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior. In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the "READY" indicator is on. Apply the parking brake as necessary. If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed. Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
When the vehicle is parked Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: · Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire. · The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. · Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components. Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
154
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
2
Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid
system and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the "READY" indicator is illumi-
nated.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or immediately after turning the hybrid system off. Doing so may cause burns.
Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
Information Provided by:
155
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
When braking
When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
If the brake system warning light (yellow indicator) comes on, maintain a larger than usual distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
If the brake system warning light (red indicator) comes on, there may be a malfunction with the brake's hydraulic system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Do not continue to drive the vehicle in this condition.
NOTICE
When driving the vehicle Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque. Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
When parking the vehicle Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
156
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
If you get a flat tire while driving
2
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 457)
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
Engine stalling
Short in electrical components
Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, hybrid transmission, etc.
Lubricant condition of the bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
Information Provided by:
157
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)
Starting the hybrid system STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
STEP 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4
Turn the engine switch to the "START" position to start the hybrid system.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started.
STEP 5 Check that the "READY" indicator is on.
If the "READY" indicator changes from a flashing light to a solid light and a beep sound, the hybrid system is starting normally.
The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.
The vehicle can move when the "READY" indicator is on even if the engine is stopped. (The engine starts or stops automatically in accordance with the state of the vehicle.)
158
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing the engine switch positions
"LOCK"
The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)
"ACC"
2
Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used.
"ON"
All electrical components can be used.
"START"
For starting the hybrid system.
Turning the key from "ACC" to "LOCK" STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 2
Push in the key and turn it to the "LOCK" position.
When driving
Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle P. 28
When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions It may take time until the "READY" indicator comes on.
Information Provided by:
159
2-1. Driving procedures
If the hybrid system does not start (vehicles with immobilizer system)
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110) Contact your Toyota dealer.
When the steering lock cannot be released
When starting the hybrid system, the engine switch may seem stuck in the "LOCK" position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and right.
If the "READY" indicator does not come on If the "READY" indicator does not come on when you turn the engine switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
If the hybrid system is malfunctioning P. 442
Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver's door is opened while the engine switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the hybrid system off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the "ACC" position to stop the hybrid system. An accident may result if the hybrid system is stopped while driving. (P. 486)
160
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the engine switch in the "ACC" or "ON" position for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.
When starting the hybrid system If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
2
When driving
Information Provided by:
161
2-1. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes "POWER" switch modes.
Starting the hybrid system STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set. STEP 2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
If the shift lever is not set in P, the hybrid system may not be started. (P. 173)
STEP 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
STEP 4
Press the "POWER" switch.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the hybrid system is completely started.
The hybrid system can be started from any "POWER" switch mode.
162
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
STEP 5 Check that the "READY" indicator is on.
If the "READY" indicator changes from a flashing light to a solid light and a beep sound, the hybrid system is starting normally.
The vehicle will not move when the "READY" indicator is off.
The vehicle can move when the "READY" indicator is on even if the engine is stopped. (The engine starts or stops automatically in accordance with the state of the vehicle.)
Stopping the hybrid system
2
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle completely.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 3 Set the parking brake. (P. 177)
STEP 4 Press the "POWER" switch.
STEP 5 Slowly release the brake pedal and check that multi-information display is off.
on the
When driving
Information Provided by:
163
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing "POWER" switch modes Modes can be changed by pressing the "POWER" switch with brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be used. The multi-information display is off.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
will be displayed on the multi-information display. *: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the hybrid system, the "POWER" switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
164
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
When driving
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the "POWER" switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
STEP 1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to P.
STEP 3 Check that
is displayed on the multi-information dis-
play and then press the "POWER" switch once.
STEP 4 Check that
on the multi-information display is off.
Auto power off function
When the shift lever is in P, if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode with the hybrid system not operating for more than 20 minutes (ACCESSORY mode) or one hour (ON mode), the "POWER" switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the "POWER" switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not operating.
Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 28
Electronic key battery depletion
P. 58
When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions
It may take time until the "READY" indicator comes on.
Conditions affecting operation P. 55
Information Provided by:
165
2-1. Driving procedures
Notes for the entry function P. 56
If the hybrid system does not start The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 110) Contact your Toyota dealer.
Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the shift lever is not securely in the P position. "SHIFT TO P POSITION TO START" will be displayed on the multiinformation display.
Steering lock After turning the "POWER" switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the "POWER" switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
When the steering lock cannot be released
"STEERING LOCK ACTIVE" will be displayed on the multi-information display. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the "POWER" switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.
Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
166
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
If the "READY" indicator does not come on
If the "READY" indicator does not come on when you press the "POWER" switch with the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 442
If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 397
2
Operation of the "POWER" switch
When operating the "POWER" switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the "POWER" switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the "POWER" switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the "POWER" switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.
When driving
Information Provided by:
167
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
When starting the hybrid system Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Caution while driving If a hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Doing so may cause activation of the steering lock which may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
When "CHECK SMART KEY SYSTEM" is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. Failure to do so may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident or damage to the vehicle.
Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the "POWER" switch for more than 3 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 486) However, do not touch the "POWER" switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
168
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the "POWER" switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time without the hybrid system on.
If
is displayed on the multi-information display, the "POWER"
switch is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the "POWER" switch off.
2
Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other
than P. If the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the
"POWER" switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCES-
SORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery
discharge may occur.
When starting the hybrid system
If the hybrid system becomes difficult to start, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the "POWER" switch
If the "POWER" switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
When driving
Information Provided by:
169
2-1. Driving procedures
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and exhaust gas emissions.
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on, the EV drive mode indicator will come on. Pressing the switch when in EV drive mode will return the vehicle to normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]).
170
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-1. Driving procedures
Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode. After the hybrid system has started and the "READY" indicator has illuminated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to switch to EV drive mode.
Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
2
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If
it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on
the multi-information display.
The temperature of the hybrid system is high. The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
The temperature of the hybrid system is low. The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 68°F (20°C) for a long period of time etc.
The gasoline engine is warming up.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low. When the amount of remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge displayed on the meter or Display Audio system is low. (P. 35)
Vehicle speed is high.
The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
The windshield defogger is in use.
Information Provided by:
171
2-1. Driving procedures
Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off. The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low. Vehicle speed becomes high. The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode In EV drive mode, it is possible to drive up to about 1.3 miles (2 km) if driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)
Fuel economy PRIUS c is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
Vehicle Proximity Notification System sound Even when EV drive mode is turned on, the Vehicle Proximity Notification System may produce a sound. (P. 25)
CAUTION
Caution while driving When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians, people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them even if the Vehicle Proximity Notification System is active. Therefore, take extra care while driving.
172
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
Hybrid transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
2
Vehicles without a smart key system While the engine switch is in the "ON" position, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. Vehicles with a smart key system While the "POWER" switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting from P to another position; from D to R or P; or from R to P, D or B; ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed and the vehicle is stationary.
When driving
Information Provided by:
173
2-1. Driving procedures
Shift position purpose
Shift position P R N D B
Function Parking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
Reversing Neutral
Normal driving*
Position for engine braking
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
Selecting Eco drive mode Suitable for enhancing the fuel economy, because the torque corresponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions and the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized.
Eco drive mode
When Eco drive mode is turned on, the "ECO MODE" indicator will come on.
Pressing the "ECO MODE" switch again turns Eco drive mode off.
174
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (P. 242) To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the temperature setting or fan speed, or turn off Eco drive mode.
When in heavy traffic If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid putting the shift 2 lever in N for an extended period of time.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 471
CAUTION
When driving on slippery road surfaces Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly. Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.
When driving
Information Provided by:
175
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver:
Right turn Left turn Lane change to the right (push and hold the lever partway)
The right hand signals will flash until you release the lever.
Lane change to the left (push and hold the lever partway)
The left hand signals will flash until you release the lever.
Turn signals can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
If the indicator flashes faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
176
Information Provided by:
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal.
To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the 2 button.
When driving
U.S.A. Canada
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more with the parking brake engaged. (P. 444)
Usage in winter time P. 229
NOTICE
Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
Information Provided by:
177
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the
mark.
After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P. 93)
178
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
2
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Shift position display
Displays the selected shift position. (P. 173)
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. (P. 185)
When driving
Information Provided by:
179
2-2. Instrument cluster
Instrument panel light control The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning the dial.
Brighter Darker
The meters and multi-information display illuminate when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights When the tail lights are turned on, the brightness will be reduced slightly unless the control dial is turned up fully.
Engine speed On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle operation and driving conditions are the same.
180
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the engine and its components This vehicle is not installed with an engine coolant temperature gauge.
Instead,
is shown on the multi-information display. The engine may
be overheating if
is shown on the multi-information display. In this
2
case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 480)
When driving
Information Provided by:
181
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicators and warning lights on the instrument cluster inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all indicators and warning lights illuminated.
182
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
When driving
Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.
Turn signal indicator (P. 176)
Headlight high beam indicator (P. 203)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator (P. 202)
Driving ready indicator (P. 158, 162)
EV drive mode indicator (P. 170)
2
Shift position indicator (P. 174)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator (P. 202)
Front fog light indicator (P. 206)
(if equipped)
Immobilizer system indi-
cator (P. 110)
(if equipped)
*1 SRS airbag
on-off indicator (P. 129)
"ECO MODE" indicator (P. 174)
EV drive indicator lamp (P. 192)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 215)
(if equipped)
(if equipped)
*1,2
Cruise control set indicator (P. 215)
Slip indicator (P. 220)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the "ON"
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Information Provided by:
183
2-2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle's systems. (P. 431)
*1, 2
*1, 3
*1
*1, 2
*1, 3
*1
*1, 2
*1, 3
(red)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
(yellow) (Flashes)
*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the "ON"
position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: For vehicles sold in U.S.A. *3: For vehicles sold in Canada
CAUTION
If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS warning light not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.
184
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.
Drive information
Displays information such as the hybrid system operating conditions and fuel consumption.
2
Settings and screen off
Perform operations such as changing the date/time and screen settings.
Warning messages (P. 441)
Automatically displayed if a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle's systems.
When driving
Information Provided by:
185
2-2. Instrument cluster
Touch tracer display (vehicles with Display Audio system)
Switching the display
When a steering wheel switch is touched, an illustration of the switch is shown on the screen, helping the driver to confirm which switch they are touching without needing to look down at their hands.
The touch tracer display can be turned off. (P. 197)
If an audio/navigation system is used that is not compatible with the steering switches in this vehicle, the audio switch display may not operate correctly.
Press the "DISP" switch on the steering wheel to change the displayed item. The "TRIP" switch may also be used for certain items.
186
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
Items displayed in the upper part of the screen The following items are always displayed in the upper part of the screen. (When using some menu items, these items will not be displayed.)
2
When driving
Odometer/trip meter P. 188
Average fuel consumption Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the displayed contents differ. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
When the odometer is displayed: the average fuel consumption since the hybrid system was started is displayed.
When the trip meter is displayed: the average fuel consumption since the trip meter was reset is displayed. The average fuel consumption for trip meter A and trip meter B is displayed separately.
When the trip meter is reset, average fuel consumption is also reset. (P. 188)
Clock Change the time on the settings screen. (P. 197)
Information Provided by:
187
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/trip meter Each time the "TRIP" switch is pressed, the display changes as follows:
Odometer Displays the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Some models, pressing and holding the "TRIP" switch will switch the display between MPH and km/h.
Trip meter Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. The trip meters can be split and used in 2 categories, A or B.
Pressing and holding the "TRIP" switch will reset the trip meter.
188
Information Provided by:
Switching menu screens
2-2. Instrument cluster
When driving
2
Each time the "DISP" switch is pressed, the menu screen changes. When the desired menu screen is displayed, stop pressing the "DISP" switch. The details screen will soon be displayed.
However, to display the "Settings & Screen Off" details screen, press and hold the "DISP" switch after the "Settings & Screen Off" menu screen is displayed.
"Energy Monitor"
Operating conditions of the hybrid system can be confirmed. (P. 35)
"Drive Information"
Average speed, driving time, EV driving rate/EV driven distance, cruising range and outside temperature (P. 331) are displayed. (P. 190)
"ECO Score"
Evaluates the level of Eco-friendly driving and displays the results. (P. 192)
"5min Consumption"*
Displays the average fuel consumption in intervals of 5 minutes. Current fuel consumption is simultaneously displayed, allowing it to be compared with previous fuel consumption rates. (P. 39)
Information Provided by:
189
2-2. Instrument cluster
"ECO Savings"
If the price of gasoline is input, the cost of the consumed fuel according to the driven distance is displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison is set, the difference between the input fuel consumption and your vehicle's actual fuel consumption is expressed as an amount of money that was possibly saved. (P. 193)
"ECO Savings Record"*
Displays eco savings record. (P. 194)
"Past Record"*
Displays the best 3 fuel consumption records and the current fuel consumption ranking. Fuel consumption can also be displayed by the month. (P. 40)
"Settings & Screen Off"
Operations such as changing each screen's setting and the date/time can be performed. (P. 196) *: Settings are set to off (initialized settings) at the time of shipping. (P. 199)
"Drive Information"
Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the displayed contents of average speed, driving time, and EV driving rate/EV driven distance differ.
When the odometer is displayed: the record since the hybrid system was started is displayed.
190
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
When driving
When the trip meter is displayed: the record since the trip meter was reset is displayed. The record for trip meter A and trip meter B is displayed separately.
When the trip meter is reset, the record is also reset. (P. 188)
Average speed Average speed will be displayed.
Driving time
Driving time will be displayed.
2
EV driving rate/EV driven distance
EV driving rate and driven distance (percentage and distance driven using just the electric motor [traction motor] only) will be displayed.
Cruising range Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
· This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
· When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated. Vehicles without a smart key system: when refueling, turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch to the "LOCK" position, the display may not be updated. Vehicles with a smart key system: when refueling, turn the "POWER" switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the "POWER" switch off, the display may not be updated.
Outside temperature P. 331
Information Provided by:
191
2-2. Instrument cluster
"ECO Score"
Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge level display EV drive indicator lamp
Illuminates when only the electric motor is used to drive the vehicle
Hybrid System Indicator
Hybrid System Indicator represents the hybrid system power output and regenerative charging. (P. 195)
Eco driving conditions display
Driving conditions are displayed in 5 stages and divided into 3 categories: start, cruise and stop. Every time the vehicle is stopped, the score is displayed. (Every time the vehicle is accelerated the score that was last displayed is reset. Accumulative scores are not calculated.)
192
Information Provided by:
"ECO Savings"
Basic display
2-2. Instrument cluster Detailed display
When driving
2
With 2 types of displays available, the cost of the consumed fuel can be displayed or the fuel consumption's comparison can be displayed.
Switching between basic display and detailed display can be performed on the screen settings screen. (P. 198)
Savings and fuel cost If the fuel consumption comparison is input (P. 198), the possible savings are displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison has not been input, your vehicle's actual fuel cost will be displayed. Depending on whether the odometer or trip meter is displayed, the displayed contents differ.
When the odometer is displayed: the savings or fuel cost since the hybrid system was started is displayed.
When the trip meter is displayed: the savings or fuel cost since the trip meter was reset is displayed. The savings or fuel cost for trip meter A or trip meter B is displayed separately.
When the trip meter is reset, savings or fuel cost is also reset. (P. 188)
"Fuel Cons. Comparison" On the settings screen, input the fuel consumption comparison. (P. 198)
The cost of consumed fuel per mile/kilometer (comparison car) Based on the fuel consumption comparison, the calculated value is displayed.
Information Provided by:
193
2-2. Instrument cluster
The cost of consumed fuel per mile/kilometer (your car) The more fuel efficient your driving is, the further left the vehicle mark moves.
"ECO Savings Record"
If the fuel consumption comparison is input in "ECO Savings", the savings history will be displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison is not input, fuel cost history will be displayed. Fuel costs for the current month, the last 3 months and the same month last year are displayed, enabling a comparison to be made.
194
Information Provided by:
When driving
Hybrid System Indicator
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
Charge area
Shows energy regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). *: When used in this manual, "regeneration" refers to the conversion of
energy created by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not being used very often. The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various conditions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that the driving power is more than the upper limit of Eco driving. (during full power driving etc.)
Keeping the indicator within Eco area can help Eco-friendly driving.
Information Provided by:
195
2-2. Instrument cluster
Screen settings
If "Settings & Screen Off" is selected on the menu screen, the following items can be set. Always perform this operation after stopping the vehicle in a safe place. (Some items cannot be set while driving.)
Press the "DISP" switch on the steering wheel to move the cursor. To switch to the settings screen, press and hold the "DISP" switch while the cursor is on the desired item.
196
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
Basic settings/Changing the clock shortcut
2
The date, time, clock mode (12 or 24 hour), touch tracer settings and the displayed language can be changed. Pressing the "DISP" (forward) or "TRIP" (back) switch changes the
date. Press the "DISP" switch to select hours or minutes. Pressing the
"TRIP" switch adjusts the hours or minutes. If set clock is selected, the screen will change to the clock settings
screen.
When driving
Information Provided by:
197
2-2. Instrument cluster
"ECO savings" settings
The gasoline price and fuel consumption comparison settings can be set, and the screen settings can be changed between basic and detailed.
To input the gasoline price, press the "DISP" (to increase) or "TRIP" (to reduce) switch.
When the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) after refueling, the gasoline price input screen is automatically displayed.
To input the fuel consumption comparison, press the "DISP" (to increase) or "TRIP" (to reduce) switch.
When the fuel consumption comparison is input, the estimated savings in fuel costs are displayed. If the fuel consumption comparison is not input, the cost of the consumed fuel will be displayed.
198
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Menu screen selection
The following screen changes and settings can be performed:
Screen off The screen can be turned off.
· The eco savings record screen can be switched on or off.
· The 5 minute fuel consumption screen can be switched 2 on or off.
· Past record can be reset. · The past record screen can be
switched between off, monthly average and personal best.
The upper part of the screen is always displayed and cannot be turned off.
Trip summary display
When the hybrid system is turned off, drive information data since the system was started is displayed after the ending animation.
When the doors are locked, the screen turns off.
Information Provided by:
199
2-2. Instrument cluster
The clock is displayed when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode. Eco score As the accelerator pedal is not depressed, the driven distance using
cruise control (if equipped) is not included in the eco score. As the eco score evaluation differs according to driving conditions and
environmental factors, in some cases it may not be linked to fuel consumption. Eco savings Fuel cost and savings should be used as a guide only. Depending on refueling methods, driving conditions and environmental factors, the actual and displayed fuel costs may differ. In some cases, fuel cost and savings may not be linked to the eco score evaluation. When disconnecting and reconnecting 12-volt battery terminals The following information data will be reset: Clock Past record (aside from the top 3 results) Average fuel consumption Cruising range Average vehicle speed Driving time EV driving rate/EV driven distance Additionally, some displays may return to their default settings. Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
200
Information Provided by:
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
Eco score Eco score should be used as a guide only. Always drive safely in accordance with road and traffic conditions.
NOTICE
2
The multi-information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
When driving
Information Provided by:
201
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A The daytime running lights turn on. The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on. The daytime running lights turn off.
202
Information Provided by:
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The daytime running lights turn on. The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn 2 on. The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
Information Provided by:
203
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night. For type A: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" or "ACC" position and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Vehicles with a smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the "POWER" switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.
Battery-saving function
In the following conditions, the remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged:
The headlights and/or tail lights are on.
The engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off (vehicles with a smart key system).
This function will be canceled in any of the following situations:
When the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
When the light switch is operated.
When the door is opened or closed.
204
Information Provided by:
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Setting of the daytime running light system can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 516)
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
2
When driving
Information Provided by:
205
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.
Type A Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on
206
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on
2
Fog lights can be used when The headlights are on in low beam.
When driving
Information Provided by:
207
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows: Type A
Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency* Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not be equipped depending on vehicle grade.
208
Information Provided by:
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
2
Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation
When driving
Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency* Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not be equipped depending on vehicle grade.
Information Provided by:
209
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
210
Information Provided by:
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked
2
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
When driving
Information Provided by:
211
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:
Type A
Intermittent window wiper operation Normal window wiper operation Washer/wiper dual operation Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
212
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
Type B
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Intermittent window wiper operation Normal window wiper operation Washer/wiper dual operation Washer/wiper dual 2 operation
The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
When driving
The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.
Information Provided by:
213
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
When the rear window is dry Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
214
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
Indicators Cruise control switch
2
Setting the vehicle speed
STEP 1
Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.
STEP 2
Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.
"SET" indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
215
2-4. Using other driving systems
Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.
Increases the speed Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
216
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control can be set when The shift lever is in D. Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes. Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be 2 increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed. At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained. Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). VSC is activated.
If "CHECK CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM" is shown on the multi-information display Press the "ON-OFF" button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system. If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Information Provided by:
217
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the "ON-OFF" button when not in use.
Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. In heavy traffic On roads with sharp bends On winding roads On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow On steep hills Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
218
Information Provided by:
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
Brake assist
2
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces
TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
Hill-start assist control
P. 222
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel
When driving
Information Provided by:
219
2-4. Using other driving systems
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS/hill-start assist control systems are operating
The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC/ABS/hillstart assist control systems are operating.
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hillstart assist control system is operating.
Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and VSC systems
A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle begins to move, if the brake pedal is depressed forcefully or repeatedly, or 1 - 2 minuets after the hybrid system is stopped. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
· Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. · A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. · The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. · The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
220
Information Provided by:
2-4. Using other driving systems
When driving
CAUTION
The ABS does not operate effectively when Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads. Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
2
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads When driving with tire chains When driving over bumps in the road When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS are activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
Information Provided by:
221
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control
Assists with starting off and temporarily maintains braking power even if the foot is removed from the brake pedal when starting off on an incline or a slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist control, further depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to indicate the system is activated. The slip indicator will also start flashing.
Hill-start assist control operating conditions The system operates in the following situations: · The shift lever is in a position other than P. · The parking brake is not applied. · The accelerator pedal is not depressed. Hill-start assist control cannot be operated while the slip indicator light is illuminated.
Hill-start assist control While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automatically applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and the high mounted stoplight turn on. Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released. If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check that the operating conditions explained above have been met.
222
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Hill-start assist control buzzer
When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the buzzer will sound twice.
· No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds
of releasing the brake pedal.
· The shift lever is moved to P.
· The parking brake is applied.
· The brake pedal is depressed again.
2
· The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3
minutes.
If a buzzer other than the hill-start assist control buzzer is sounding, the
hill-start assist control buzzer may not sound.
If the slip indicator comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Hill-start assist control Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
Information Provided by:
223
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:
Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
Be sure all items are secured in place.
To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage evenly within the luggage compartment.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) -- (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
224
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 490)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Example based on your vehicle
2
Cargo capacity Total load capacity
When driving
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 845 lb. (380 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
845 lb. -- 366 lb. = 479 lb. (380 kg -- 166 kg = 214 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
479 lb. -- 388 lb. = 91 lb. (214 kg -- 176 kg = 38 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
225
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:
Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans
Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seatbacks. Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle in the event of sudden braking or in an accident.
Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver's vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
· At the feet of the driver · On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) · On the luggage cover (if equipped) · On the instrument panel · On the dashboard Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
226
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Capacity and distribution
Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
2
When driving
Information Provided by:
227
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Total load capacity: 845 lb. (380 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3) Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person. Towing capacity Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 388)
CAUTION
Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
228
Information Provided by:
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
· Engine oil
2
· Engine/power control unit coolant
· Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt
battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.
Information Provided by:
229
2-5. Driving information
When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.
Selecting tire chains Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain (0.12 in. [3.0 mm] in diameter) Cross chain (0.16 in. [4.0 mm] in diameter)
Regulations on the use of tire chains Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
230
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information
Tire chain installation Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains: Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires. Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
2
Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. Use tires of the size specified. Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used. Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
When driving
Information Provided by:
231
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
Driving with tire chains Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury. Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower. Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes. Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
232
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
2
When driving
Information Provided by:
233
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
234
Information Provided by:
2-5. Driving information 2
When driving
Information Provided by:
235
2-5. Driving information
236
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Cooling and dehumidification Temperature display function on/off button
Fan speed display
Windshield defogger button
Air outlet display
Outside/recirculated air mode button
Temperature control dial
Air outlet selector button Fan speed control button
"OFF" button Automatic mode button
236
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Using the automatic air conditioning system
STEP 1 Press
.
The air conditioning system begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
STEP 2 To adjust the temperature setting, turn
clockwise to
increase the temperature and turn decrease the temperature. Adjusting the settings manually
counterclockwise to
3
STEP 1 To adjust the fan speed, press "" on
to increase the
fan speed and "" to decrease the fan speed.
Press
to turn the fan off.
STEP 2 To adjust the temperature setting, turn
clockwise to
increase the temperature and turn decrease the temperature.
counterclockwise to
STEP 3 To change the air outlets, press
.
The air outlets used are switched each time the button is pressed. (P. 238)
Interior features
Information Provided by:
237
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield Air outlets and air flow
Press
.
The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press
again when the
windshield is defogged.
Air flows to the upper body.
238
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and feet.
: Some models
* *
: Some models
Air flows mainly to the feet.
*: When the warming function is operating, air flows to the upper 3 body as well to warm the upper body effectively.
Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.
: Some models
Interior features
Information Provided by:
239
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press
.
The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time the button is pressed.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
240
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Open the vent. Close the vent.
Steering wheel switches
Temperature control
3
Press "" on
to increase
the temperature and "" to decrease the temperature.
Outside air or recirculated air mode
The mode switches between outside air mode and recirculated air
mode each time is pressed.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
241
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency: Heating/cooling capacity is restricted. Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on
the temperature setting or the inside temperature. Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations: Adjust the fan speed or the temperature setting Turn off Eco drive mode Customization The air conditioning control of Eco drive mode can be changed to the same setting as that used in normal drive mode. (Customizable features P. 516) Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after
is pressed.
Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the
windshield effectively.
If you turn
off, the windows may fog up more easily.
The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
242
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on
In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
3
Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when
is
pressed.
Air conditioning odors
During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
To reduce potential odors from occurring:
· It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
· The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
Information Provided by:
243
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air conditioning filter P. 395
When operating the steering switches P. 186
CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use
during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
244
Information Provided by:
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Turns the defoggers on/off
The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
3
The defoggers can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped) Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.
CAUTION
When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (if equipped) Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very hot and burn you.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
245
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Without Display Audio system CD player and AM/FM radio
Title Using the radio Using the CD player Playing back MP3 and WMA discs Operating an iPod Operating a USB memory Optimal use of the audio system Using the AUX port
Page P. 252 P. 254 P. 259 P. 266 P. 274 P. 282 P. 285
246
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
With Display Audio system Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".
3
About Bluetooth® The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permission has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are owned by various different owners.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
247
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
U.S.A. (without Display Audio system) Part 15 of the FCC Rules FCC ID: ACJ932PTA184 FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Canada (without Display Audio system) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
248
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l'intensité 3 nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l'exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Interior features
Information Provided by:
249
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. (with Display Audio system) FCC ID: BABFT0032A This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
250
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
CAUTION
For vehicles sold in Canada (with Display Audio system)
IC: 2024B-FT0032A
CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
This Category II radiocommunication device complies with Industry Canada 3 Standard RSS-310.
Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de catégorie II respecte la norme CNR310 d'Industrie Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
To avoid damaging the audio system Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
Information Provided by:
251
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Power
Volume
Station selector
Adjusting the frequency or selecting items
Seeking the frequency
Scanning for receivable stations
AM/FM mode button
Setting station presets
STEP 1 Search for desired stations by turning
or pressing ""
or "" on
.
STEP 2 Press and hold a desired station selector button until you hear a beep.
252
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning radio stations
Scanning the preset radio stations
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press
again.
Scanning all the radio stations within range
STEP 1 Press
.
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
STEP 2 When the desired station is reached, press
again.
3
When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
Preset stations are erased.
Reception sensitivity
Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna when driving, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
When ble.
is used, automatic station selection may not be possi-
The radio antenna is mounted on the rear roof. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it.
NOTICE
To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases. The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage. A car cover will be put on the roof.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
253
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Power
Volume CD eject
Random playback
Repeat play
Selecting a track or displays track list
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a track
Fast-forwarding or reversing
Displays text message
Loading CDs Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press
and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Turn
or press "" to move up or "" to move down using
until the desired track number is displayed.
254
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track from a track list
STEP 1 Press
.
The track list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
Scanning tracks
STEP 1 Press
.
3
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
STEP 2 Press
again when the desired track is reached.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ).
( ) or
Random playback
Press
(RDM).
To cancel, press
(RDM) again.
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
255
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Press
.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Display Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding second or more will display the remaining characters. A maximum of 64 characters can be displayed.
for 1
If
is pressed for 1 second or more again, or has not been pressed
for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.
Error messages
"ERROR": This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
"CD CHECK": The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
"WAIT":
Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the
player. Wait for a while and then press
. If the CD
still cannot be played back, contact your Toyota dealer.
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used. CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
256
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Certification for the CD player This product is a class I laser product. A laser beam leak may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself. Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual 3 Discs. Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function. CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)
Low-quality and deformed CDs
Interior features
Information Provided by:
257
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area
CDs that have had tape, stickers or CDR labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off
CD player precautions Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself. Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot. Do not apply oil to the CD player. Store CDs away from direct sunlight. Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
Lens cleaners Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
258
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Power
Volume Disc eject
Random playback
Repeat play
Selecting a file or displays folder list
Interior features
3
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a file
Selecting a folder, fastforwarding or reversing
Displays text message
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs P. 254
Selecting a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
Press
( ) or
( ) to select the desired folder.
Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
STEP 1 Press
.
The folder list will be displayed.
Information Provided by:
259
3-2. Using the audio system
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press
Returning to the first folder
(BACK).
Press and hold
( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Selecting files
Turn
or press "" or "" on
to select the desired file.
Scanning files
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired file is reached, press
again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ).
( ) or
260
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
3
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Interior features
Information Provided by:
261
3-2. Using the audio system
Display
P. 256
Error messages
"ERROR":
This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
"CD CHECK": The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
"NO SUPPORT": This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in the CD.
Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used. Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
262
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.
MP3 file compatibility
· Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
· Compatible sampling frequencies
3
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
144, 160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
· Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
· Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
Interior features
Information Provided by:
263
3-2. Using the audio system
Compatible media Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CDRWs. Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
Compatible disc formats The following disc formats can be used. · Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2 CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2 · File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet) MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows. · Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels · Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters · Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root) · Maximum number of files per disc: 255
File names The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
Multi-sessions As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
ID3 and WMA tags ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc. The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.) WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
264
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.
Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
3
Playback
· To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
· CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
· There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
· When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
· Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 257) CD player precautions (P. 258) If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods (P. 258) Lens cleaners (P. 258)
Information Provided by:
265
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Connecting an iPod
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
STEP 2 Press
.
Control panel
Power
Volume
Shuffle playback
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
iPod menu mode
Repeat play
Selecting an iPod menu/song or displays song list
Selecting a song
Playback
Fast-forwarding or reversing
Displays text message
266
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
Selecting a play mode
STEP 1 Press
(BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
STEP 2 Turning
clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-
lowing order: "Playlists""Artists""Albums""Songs""Podcasts""Genres" "Composers""Audiobooks"
STEP 3 Press
to select the desired play mode.
Play mode list
3
Play mode "Playlists" "Artists" "Albums" "Songs" "Podcasts" "Genres" "Composers" "Audiobooks"
First selection Playlists select
Artists select
Albums select Songs select Podcasts select
Genre select
Composers select Audiobooks select
Second selection Songs select Albums select Songs select
-
Episodes select
Artists select
Albums select Chapters select
Third selection
-
Songs select
-
-
-
Albums select Songs select
-
Fourth selection
-
-
-
-
Songs select
-
-
Information Provided by:
267
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a list
STEP 1 Turn
to display the first selection list.
STEP 2 Press
to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
STEP 3 Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press
(BACK).
Selecting songs
Turn
or press "" or "" on
to select the desired song.
Selecting a song from the song list
STEP 1 Press
.
The song list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn
to select a song.
STEP 3 Press
to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
268
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ).
( ) or
Shuffle playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track shuffle Album shuffle Off
Repeat play
3
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press
(RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Album title are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
STEP 1 Press STEP 2 Press
to enter iPod menu mode. to change sound modes. (P. 282)
Interior features
Information Provided by:
269
3-2. Using the audio system
Cord hook About iPod
A cord can be secured as shown in the illustration.
Cords with a diameter of approximately 0.2 in. (5 mm) can be secured.
"Made for iPod" and "Made for iPhone" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
270
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
iPod functions
When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.
iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect 3 your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it. For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.
Display
P. 256
Error messages
"iPod ERROR": This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.
"ERROR 3":
This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.
"ERROR 4":
This indicates that an over current error has occurred.
"ERROR 5":
This indicates that an iPod communication error has occurred.
"ERROR 6":
This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.
"NO SONGS": This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
"NO PLAYLIST": This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
"UPDATE YOUR iPod": This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
271
3-2. Using the audio system
Compatible models The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system. Made for · iPod touch (4th generation) · iPod touch (3rd generation) · iPod touch (2nd generation) · iPod touch (1st generation) · iPod classic · iPod with video · iPod nano (6th generation) · iPod nano (5th generation) · iPod nano (4th generation) · iPod nano (3rd generation) · iPod nano (2nd generation) · iPod nano (1st generation) · iPhone 4 · iPhone 3GS · iPhone 3G · iPhone Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: Maximum number of lists in device: 9999 Maximum number of songs in device: 65535 Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
272
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
Cord hook Do not secure items other than cords on the cord hook. Doing so may damage the cord hook.
To prevent damage to iPod Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod. Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal. Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
3
Interior features
Information Provided by:
273
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect a USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.
STEP 2 Press
.
Control panel
Power
Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Selecting a file or displays folder list
Selecting a file
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a folder, fastforwarding or reversing Displays text message
274
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a folder
Selecting folders one at a time
To select the desired folder, press
( ) or
Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
( ).
STEP 1 Press
.
The folder list will be displayed.
STEP 2 Turn and press
to select a folder and a file.
3
To return to the previous display, press
(BACK).
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold
( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Selecting files
Turn
, or press "" or "" on
to select the desired file.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
275
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning files
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired folder is reached, press
again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ).
( ) or
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random Disc random Off
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat Folder repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
276
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Cord hook
P. 270
USB memory functions
Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.
Display
P. 256
3
Error messages
"ERROR": This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
"NO MUSIC": This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
277
3-2. Using the audio system
USB memory Compatible devices USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback Compatible device formats The following device formats can be used: · USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps) · File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows) · Correspondence class: Mass storage class MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly. Items related to standards and limitations are as follows: · Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels · Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root) · Maximum number of files in a device: 9999 · Maximum number of files per folder: 255 MP3 and WMA files MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format. Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3 compression. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format. This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format. There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
278
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
MP3 file compatibility
· Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
· Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz) · Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
· Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
WMA file compatibility
3
· Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
· Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
· Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
279
3-2. Using the audio system
MP3 and WMA playback · When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders. · When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
Extensions If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
Playback · To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz. · There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all. · Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
280
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
Cord hook (P. 273) To prevent damage to USB memory
Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
3
Interior features
Information Provided by:
281
3-2. Using the audio system
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the current mode Changes the following settings · Sound quality and vol-
ume balance (P. 283)
The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound.
· Automatic Sound Levelizer on/off (P. 284)
Selecting the mode
282
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
Using the audio control function
Changing sound quality modes
STEP 1 Press
.
STEP 2 Turn
to select "Sound Setting".
STEP 3 Press
.
STEP 4 Turn
to select the desired mode.
3
"BASS", "TREBLE", "FADER", "BALANCE", or "ASL"
STEP 5 Press
.
Adjusting sound quality
Turning
adjusts the level.
Mode
Sound
displayed quality mode
"BASS"
Bass*
"TREBLE"
Treble*
"FADER"
Front/rear volume balance
"BALANCE"
Left/right volume balance
Level -5 to 5 -5 to 5 R7 to F7
L7 to R7
Turn to the Turn to the
left
right
Low
High
Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Shifts to left Shifts to right
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Information Provided by:
283
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turning
to the right changes the
amount of ASL in the order of "LOW", "MID" and "HIGH".
Turning
to the left turns ASL off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.
284
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicle's speakers.
STEP 1
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
STEP 2 Press
until "AUX" is displayed.
3
Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
285
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Operation may differ and usage may not be possible with audio/navigation systems that are not compatible with the steering switches in this vehicle.
Volume Radio mode: Select radio stations CD mode: Select tracks and files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects a song
USB memory mode: Selects a folder and file Bluetooth® audio mode: Selects an album and track
Power on, select audio source
Turning on the power
Press
when the audio system is turned off.
Changing the audio source
Press
when the audio system is turned on. The audio source
changes as follows each time used, it will be skipped.
is pressed. If a mode cannot be
AM FM CD mode iPod or USB memory mode Bluetooth® audio AUX
286
Information Provided by:
3-2. Using the audio system
Adjusting the volume
Press "+" on
to increase the volume and "-" to decrease the vol-
ume.
Hold down "+" or "-" on ume.
to continue increasing or decreasing the vol-
Silencing a sound
Press and hold
.
To cancel, press and hold
again.
3
Selecting a radio station
STEP 1 Press
to select the radio mode.
STEP 2 Press "" or "" on
to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold "" or "" on until you hear a beep.
Selecting a track/file or song
STEP 1 Press
to select CD, iPod, USB memory or Bluetooth®
audio mode.
STEP 2 Press "" or "" on song.
to select the desired track/file or
Interior features
Information Provided by:
287
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a folder or album (MP3 and WMA, USB memory and Bluetooth® audio)
STEP 1 Press mode.
to select CD, USB memory or Bluetooth® audio
STEP 2 Press and hold "" or "" on
until you hear a beep.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of an accident Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
288
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio/phone
Bluetooth® audio The Bluetooth® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Bluetooth® phone (hands-free phone system) This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone 3 and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
289
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Conditions affecting operation The Bluetooth® audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situations: The portable player does not support Bluetooth® The cellular phone is located outside the service area The Bluetooth® device is switched off The Bluetooth® device has a low battery The Bluetooth® device is not connected to the system The Bluetooth® device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or metal material covers or touches the device
When transferring ownership of the vehicle Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. (P. 310)
About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
290
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Compatible models Bluetooth® specifications: Ver. 1.1, or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
Following Profiles:
· A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
· AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth® audio system. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
Cellular phone
· HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.5)
3
· OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
· PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
CAUTION
Caution while driving Do not use a cellular phone. Do not connect Bluetooth® device or operate the controls.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to Bluetooth® device Do not leave Bluetooth® device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the device.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
291
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone
Audio unit
Bluetooth® connection condition
If "BT" is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio/phone cannot be used.
Display A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.
Displays the set up menu Selects items such as menu and number Turn: Selects an item Press: Inputs the selected item Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold) Selects speed dials
292
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Audio switches P. 286
Telephone switches
Microphone Vehicles without moon roof
Volume
On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
3
Vehicles with moon roof
Interior features
Information Provided by:
293
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth® audio/phone, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® device in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a device:
STEP 1 Press
and select "Bluetooth" using
.
STEP 2 Press
and select "Pairing" using
.
A passkey will be displayed.
STEP 3 SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth® devices: Input the passkey into the device. SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices: Select "Yes" to register the device. Depending on the type of device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth® device has both music player and cellular phone functions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When deleting the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the "PHONE" mode is entered when no phones have been registered, the registration screen will be automatically displayed.
294
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio/phone
First menu Second menu
Third menu
Operation details
"BT Pairing"
-
Registering a Bluetooth® device
"List Phone"
-
Listing the registered cellular phones
"List Audio"
-
Listing the registered portable players
"Passkey"
-
Changing the passkey
"Bluetooth" "BT Power"
Setting automatic
-
connection of the device 3
on or off
"Bluetooth info"
"Device Name" "Device Address"
Displaying the device status
Setting the automatic
"Display Setting"
-
connection confirmation
display to on or off
"Initialize"
-
Initializing the settings
Interior features
Information Provided by:
295
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
First menu Second menu
"Phonebook" "Phone"
"HF Sound Setting" "Transfer Histories"
Third menu "Add contacts"
"Add SD"
"Delete Call History"
"Delete contacts"
"Delete other PB" "Call volume" "Ring tone volume" "Ringtone"
-
Operation details Adding a new number Registering a speed dial Deleting a number stored in the call history Deleting a number stored in the phonebook Deleting a phonebook's data Setting call volume
Setting ringtone volume
Setting the ringtone Transferring the call histories
Bluetooth® audio/phone system functions Depending on the Bluetooth® device, certain functions may not be available.
296
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player
Power
Volume
Selecting an album, fast-forwarding or reversing Repeat play Random playback Selecting items
Interior features
3
Search playback
Playback
Selecting a track
Playback/Pause
Displays text message
Selecting an album
Press
( ) or
( ) to select the desired album.
Scanning an album
STEP 1 Press and hold
until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track in the each album will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired album is reached, press
again.
Selecting tracks
Press "" or "" on
to select the desired track.
Information Provided by:
297
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Scanning tracks
STEP 1 Press
.
The first 10 seconds of all tracks in the album will be played.
STEP 2 When the desired track is reached, press
again.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press
(
) to play or pause a track.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold ( ).
( ) or
Random playback
Pressing
(RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random All track random Off
Repeat play
Pressing
(RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat Album repeat* Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press
.
Track title and Artist name are displayed on the display.
To return to the previous display, press
or
(BACK).
298
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system Bluetooth® audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
3
Interior features
Information Provided by:
299
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Making a phone call
To enter the "PHONE" mode, press the off-hook switch.
Making a phone call Dialing by selecting a name Speed dialing Dialing by entering the number Dialing from call histories
Receiving a phone call Answering the phone Refusing the call
Operations during a call Transferring a call Muting your voice Inputting digits Setting call volume
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
300
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Dialing by selecting a name
STEP 1 Select "Phonebook" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired name using
and press the off-hook
switch.
By pressing
(Add S. Dial) and then one of the speed dial but-
tons (from
to
) while the desired name is selected, it
can be registered as a speed dial.
3
Speed dialing
STEP 1 Select "Speed dials" using
.
STEP 2 Press the desired preset button (from press the off-hook switch.
to
) and
By pressing
(Add S. Dial) and then one of the speed dial but-
tons (from
to
) while the desired name is selected, it
can be registered as a speed dial.
Dialing by entering the number
STEP 1 Select "Dial by number" using
.
STEP 2 Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
301
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Dialing from call histories
STEP 1 Select "All calls", "Missed calls", "Incoming calls" or "Outgoing
calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired number using hook switch.
The following operations can be performed: Registering a number as a speed dial
and press the off-
Press
(Add S. Dial) and then press and hold the desired
preset button (from
to
).
Deleting the selected number
Press
(DELETE) and press
(YES).
When receiving a phone call
Answering the phone Press the off-hook switch.
Refusing the call Press the on-hook switch.
Receiving a call when on another call Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
302
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Interior features
Operations during a call
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.
b. Press the
* (PHONE).
*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from 3 the cellular phone to the system during a call.
Muting your voice
Press
(MUTE).
Inputting digits
Press
(0 - 9) and use
to input the desired digits.
· To send the input digits press
(SEND).
· When finished, press
Setting call volume
(EXIT) to return to the previous screen.
Change the call volume using
.
To decrease the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
clockwise.
Information Provided by:
303
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
Change the ringtone volume using
.
To decrease the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
clockwise.
When talking on the phone Do not talk simultaneously with the other party. Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.
Automatic volume adjustment When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
Phone call system functions Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
Situations where the system may not recognize your voice When driving on a rough road When driving at high speeds When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
304
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the "SET UP" menu ("Bluetooth" menu)
Registering a Bluetooth® device in the system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered devices:
Functions and operation procedures
STEP 1 Press
and select "Bluetooth" using
.
STEP 2 Press
and select one of the following functions
using
.
Registering a Bluetooth® device
3
"BT Pairing"
Listing the registered cellular phones "List Phone"
Listing the registered portable players "List Audio"
Changing the passkey "Passkey"
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off "BT Power"
Displaying the device status "Bluetooth info"
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off "Display Setting"
Initialization "Initialize"
Interior features
Information Provided by:
305
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Registering a portable player
Select "Pairing" using
, and perform the procedure for register-
ing a portable player. (P. 294)
Listing the registered cellular phones
Select "List Phone" using
. The list of registered cellular
phones will be displayed.
Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
STEP 1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected
using
.
STEP 2 Select "Select" using
.
Deleting a registered cellular phone
STEP 1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using
.
STEP 2 Select "Delete" using
.
STEP 3 Press
(YES).
306
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Listing the registered portable players
Select "List Audio" using
. The list of registered portable play-
ers will be displayed.
Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
STEP 1 Select the name of the portable player to be connected
using
.
STEP 2 Select "Select" using
.
3
Deleting the registered portable player
STEP 1 Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using
.
STEP 2 Select "Delete" using
.
STEP 3 Press
(YES).
Interior features
Information Provided by:
307
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Changing the passkey
STEP 1 Select "Passkey" using
.
STEP 2 Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using
.
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
STEP 3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press
again.
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing not necessary.
again is
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
If "BT Power" is set to on, the registered device will be connected automatically when the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" position.
STEP 1 Select "BT Power" using
.
STEP 2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using
.
308
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Displaying the device status
Select "Bluetooth info" using
.
Displaying the device name
Select "Device Name" using
.
Displaying the device address
Select "Device Address" using
.
3
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
If the "Display Setting" is set to on, the portable player connection status will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "ON" position.
STEP 1 Select "Display Setting" using
.
STEP 2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using
.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
309
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Initialization
Select "Initialize" using
.
Initializing the sound settings
Select "Sound setting" using
and press
For details about sound settings: P. 311
Initializing the device information
(YES).
Select "Car Device Info" using
and press
(YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confirmation display and the passkey will be initialized.
Initializing all the settings
Select "All Initialize" using
and press
(YES).
The number of Bluetooth® devices that can be registered Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered in the system.
310
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Using the "SET UP" menu ("Phone" menu)
Functions and operation procedures To enter the menu of each function, press
and follow the
steps below using
:
Adding a new phone number 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Add contacts"
Setting speed dials 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Add SD"
Deleting call histories
1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete Call History"
3
Deleting a registered phone number 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete contacts"
Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook 1. "Phone" 2. "Phonebook" 3. "Delete other PB"
Setting call volume 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Call Volume"
Setting ringtone volume 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Ringtone Volume"
Setting ringtone 1. "Phone" 2. "HF Sound Setting" 3. "Ringtone"
Transferring call histories 1. "Phone" 2. "Transfer Histories"
Interior features
Information Provided by:
311
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Adding a new phone number
Select "Add contacts" using
.
Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select "Overwrite all contacts" using
and press
(YES).
Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select "Add one contact" using
and press
(YES).
Setting speed dials
STEP 1 Select "Add SD" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired data using
.
STEP 3 Press and hold the desired preset button (from
to
). For details about setting speed dials from the call history: P. 302
For details about deleting speed dials: P. 301
312
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting call histories
Select "Delete Call History" using
.
Deleting outgoing call history
STEP 1 Select "Outgoing Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
(YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press
then press
(YES).
Deleting incoming call history
STEP 1 Select "Incoming calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
(YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press
then press
(YES).
and press
3
(ALL) and
and press (ALL) and
Interior features
Information Provided by:
313
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting missed call history
STEP 1 Select "Missed Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
and press
(YES).
To delete all missed call history data, press
press
(YES).
(ALL) and then
Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming calls and Missed calls)
STEP 1 Select "All Calls" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
and press
(YES).
To delete all of the call histories data, press
press
(YES).
(ALL) and then
314
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Deleting a registered phone number
STEP 1 Select "Delete contacts" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phone number using
and press
(YES). To delete all of the registered phone numbers, select "All delete"
using
and press
(YES).
3
Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook
STEP 1 Select "Delete other PB" using
.
STEP 2 Select the desired phonebook using (YES).
Setting call volume
and press
STEP 1 Select "Call Volume" using STEP 2 Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
.
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
clockwise.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
315
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Setting ringtone volume
STEP 1 Select "Ringtone Volume" using
.
STEP 2 Change the ringtone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn
counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn
Setting ringtone
clockwise.
STEP 1 Select "Ringtone" using
.
STEP 2 Using
, select a ringtone (1 - 3). To set the selected
ringtone, press
.
Transferring call histories
Select "Transfer Histories" using
and press
(YES).
316
Information Provided by:
3-3. Using the Bluetooth® audio system
Phone number Up to 1000 names can be stored.
Call history Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and missed call history memories.
Limitation of number of digits A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
3
Interior features
Information Provided by:
317
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior lights/personal lights (P. 319) Luggage compartment light
318
Information Provided by:
Interior lights/personal lights Interior lights
3-4. Using the interior lights Interior lights/personal lights
Turns the lights off Turns the lights on/off linked to door positions Turns the lights on
Personal lights
3
Turns the lights on
Turns the lights off
Interior features
Information Provided by:
319
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights/personal lights
Illuminated entry system Vehicles without a smart key system When the interior lights switch is in the "DOOR" position, the interior lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles with a smart key system When the interior lights switch is in the "DOOR" position, the interior lights automatically turn on/off according to "POWER" switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed. To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Vehicles without a smart key system If the interior lights, personal lights or luggage compartment light remain on when the engine switch is "LOCK" position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
Vehicles with a smart key system If the interior lights, personal lights or luggage compartment light remain on when the "POWER" switch is off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes. Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 516)
NOTICE
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
320
Information Provided by:
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Interior features
3
Bottle holders Auxiliary boxes (if equipped) Glove box Cup holders Console box (if equipped)
CAUTION
Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items. Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.
Information Provided by:
321
3-5. Using the storage features
Glove box
Glove box and console box
Pull up the lever to open the glove box.
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.
Console box (if equipped)
Lift the lid while pulling up the knob to release the lock.
322
Information Provided by:
3-5. Using the storage features Console box
Remove the lid at the bottom of the console box.
Small items can be stored in this space.
When using the console box lid as an armrest The lid can be slid forward or backwards.
3
CAUTION
Caution while driving Keep the console box closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open console box or the items stored inside.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
323
3-5. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes Type A
Type B
Type C
Auxiliary boxes
324
Information Provided by:
Type D
3-5. Using the storage features Auxiliary boxes
Type E (if equipped)
3
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the box Do not place items that easily roll over or extend past the box's rim. The items may be thrown out of the tray, causing an accident.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
325
3-5. Using the storage features
Cup holders Front
Cup holders
Rear (type A)
Rear (type B)
Pull down the cup holder lid.
326
Information Provided by:
3-5. Using the storage features Cup holders and bottle holders
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Items in the cup holders may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
When not in use rear cup holder (type B) Keep the cup holder closed. In the event of sudden braking, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open cup holder.
Bottle holders
3
Interior features
When using the bottle holder When storing a bottle, close the cap. The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
CAUTION
Items unsuitable for the bottle holder Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders. Items in the bottle holders may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.
Information Provided by:
327
3-5. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
NOTICE
Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
328
Information Provided by:
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.
3
Interior features
Information Provided by:
329
3-6. Other interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover to open.
330
Information Provided by:
3-6. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
The temperature display shows temperatures within the range of -40°F (-40°C) and 122°F (50°C).
The outside temperature display of the "Drive Information" screen can be displayed by pressing the "DISP" switch. (P. 189)
3
The outside temperature is displayed when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
Outside temperature display The outside temperature is shown on the multi-information display when the steering wheel climate remote control switches are used to adjust the air conditioning system's temperature or change between outside and recirculated air modes. (P. 241)
Interior features
Information Provided by:
331
3-6. Other interior features
Display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change: When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h]) When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/ exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
When "- -" or "E" is displayed The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
332
Information Provided by:
3-6. Other interior features
Power outlet
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.
Interior features
3
The power outlet can be used when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system The "POWER" switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
To prevent blown fuse Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
Information Provided by:
333
3-6. Other interior features
Seat heaters
Turns on the front left seat heater Turns on the front right seat heater
The indicator light comes on.
Push the switch once again to turn off the seat heater.
The seat heaters can be used when The "POWER" switch is in ON mode.
When not in use Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.
334
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
Burns
Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
· Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
· Persons with sensitive skin
· Persons who are fatigued · Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
3
Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
To prevent seat heater damage Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Turn the seat heaters off when the hybrid system is off, and check that the indicator is off.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
335
3-6. Other interior features
Coat hooks
CAUTION
Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.
336
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
3-6. Other interior features
Floor mat
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
STEP 1
Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.
3
STEP 2
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
*
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
337
3-6. Other interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident. When installing the driver's floor mat
Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat. Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided. Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down. Before driving
Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
With the hybrid system stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.
338
Information Provided by:
3-6. Other interior features
Luggage cover
Removing the luggage cover
STEP 1
Unhook the cords.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Push the luggage cover forward to disengage the
3
anchors.
Remove the luggage cover.
Interior features
Information Provided by:
: If equipped
339
3-6. Other interior features
Installing the luggage cover
STEP 1
Place the luggage cover on the anchors.
STEP 2
Push the luggage cover until a click sound is heard.
STEP 3 Hook the cords.
340
Information Provided by:
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water. Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
Automatic car washes Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the antenna and extend the mirrors before driving. Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint. In certain automatic car washes, the rear spoiler may interfere with machine operation. This may prevent the vehicle from being cleaned properly or result in damage to the rear spoiler.
High pressure car washes Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
342
Information Provided by:
4-1. Maintenance and care
When using a car wash (vehicles with a smart key system)
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (P. 53)
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.
Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Bumpers
4
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
343
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.) Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases: · After driving near the sea coast · After driving on salted roads · If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface · If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface · After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances · If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud · If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.
Cleaning the exterior lights Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights. Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
To prevent damage to the antenna Remove the antenna in the following situations: When the antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage or other such places When a car cover is to be used to cover the vehicle
Antenna installation and removal precautions Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed. When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
344
Information Provided by:
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner. Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth. Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
Shampooing the carpets
4
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
345
4-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
Water in the vehicle Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the luggage compartment. Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire. Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 117) An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
346
Information Provided by:
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
· Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
· Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
Cleaning the inside of the rear window
4
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
347
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following maintenance:
General maintenance General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
Scheduled maintenance Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".
Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended. For details about warranty coverage, see the separate "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".
Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
348
Information Provided by:
4-2. Maintenance
Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data. To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system
Switch the display to the odometer (P. 188) and then turn the engine switch off.
Vehicles with a smart key system
Switch the display to the odometer (P. 188) and then turn the "POWER" switch off.
STEP 2 Vehicles without a smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position. The multi-information display's initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds. While the initial screen is being displayed, press the "TRIP" steering switch (P. 186) 3 times, pressing and holding the switch on the third time.
Vehicles with a smart key system
4
Turn the "POWER" switch to ON mode. The multi-information display's initial screen will be displayed for a few seconds. While the initial screen is being displayed, press the "TRIP" steering switch (P. 186) 3 times, pressing and holding the switch on the third time.
STEP 3 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000".
Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
349
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
If your vehicle is not properly maintained Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
Handling of the 12-volt battery Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area. Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately. 12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 375)
350
Information Provided by:
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide". It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Brake fluid Coolant Engine oil Exhaust system Radiator/condenser Washer fluid
Check points
Is the brake fluid at the correct
level?
(P. 371)
Is the engine/power control unit
coolant at the correct level?
(P. 369)
4
Is the engine oil at the correct
level?
(P. 365)
There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects.
(P. 371)
Is there sufficient washer fluid? (P. 374)
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
351
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items 12-volt battery Accelerator pedal
Brake pedal
Brakes
Head restraints (Adjustable type) Hybrid transmission "Park" mechanism Indicators/buzzers Lights
Check points
Check the connections. (P. 375)
· The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
· Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
· Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor? (P. 497)
· Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play? (P. 497)
· The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.
· The brakes should work effectively.
· The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
· The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
· Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
· When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
· Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
· Do all the lights come on?
352
Information Provided by:
Items Parking brake Seat belts Seats Steering wheel
4-2. Maintenance
Check points
· Does the parking brake lever operate normally?
· When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
· Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
· The seat belts should not be damaged.
· Do the seat controls operate properly?
· Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
· Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
· There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
4
wheel.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
353
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Doors
Items
Engine hood
Fluid leaks
Tires
Check points
· Do the doors operate smoothly?
· Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
· There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
· Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
· The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.
· Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
· The wheel nuts should not be loose.
CAUTION
If the hybrid system is operating Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
354
Information Provided by:
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations: When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
4
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items 12-volt battery condition(P. 375)
Brake fluid level
(P. 371)
Engine/power control unit coolant
level
(P. 369)
Parts and tools
· Grease · Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
· FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
· Rag or paper towel · Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
· "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology For the U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. For Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
· Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
356
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items
Parts and tools
Engine oil level
(P. 365)
· "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent
· Rag or paper towel · Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses
(P. 400)
· Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs
(P. 411)
· Bulb with same number and wattage rating as original
· Phillips-head screwdriver · Flathead screwdriver · Wrench
Radiator and condenser
(P. 371)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 388)
· Tire pressure gauge · Compressed air source
4
Washer fluid
(P. 374)
· Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
· Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions: When working on the engine compartment
Vehicles without a smart key system: Make sure that the engine switch is in the "LOCK" position and the "READY" indicator is off. Vehicles with a smart key system: Make sure that the indicator on the "POWER" switch and the "READY" indicator are both off.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fans and engine drive belt.
Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.
When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille Vehicles without a smart key system: The electric cooling fan may keep rotating for about 3 minutes even after the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" position. With the engine switch in the "ON" position, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the engine switch is in the "LOCK" position when working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille. Vehicles with a smart key system: The electric cooling fan may keep rotating for about 3 minutes even after the "POWER" switch is off. With the "POWER" switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. Be sure the "POWER" switch is off when working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille.
358
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
STEP 1
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
STEP 2
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
STEP 3
Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.
360
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
After installing the support rod into the slot Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.
NOTICE
When closing the hood Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
Front
Rear
362
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When raising your vehicle Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury: Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.
Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-
ported only by the floor jack.
4
Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the floor jack.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
Fuse boxes
(P. 400)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 366)
Engine coolant radiator cap
Power control unit coolant reservoir (P. 369)
Brake fluid reservoir (P. 371)
Engine coolant reservoir (P. 369)
Engine/power control unit coolant radiator (P. 371)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser
(P. 371)
Engine oil level dipstick (P. 365)
Washer fluid tank (P. 374)
364
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
Checking the engine oil STEP 1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
STEP 2
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
4
STEP 3 Wipe the dipstick clean. STEP 4 Reinsert the dipstick fully. STEP 5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level. STEP 6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low Full
Measuring side
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
Oil quantity (Low Full)
Item
P. 493 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.) Clean funnel
STEP 1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. STEP 2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. STEP 3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
366
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil consumption The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven. More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration. A new engine consumes more oil. When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately. Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles, 1.0 L/ 1000 km) If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
4
Used engine oil Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal. Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis.
When replacing the engine oil Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
368
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
Engine coolant reservoir The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap "FULL" line "LOW" line
If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line. (P. 480)
Power control unit coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "F" and "L" lines on
the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
4
Reservoir cap "F" line "L" line
If the level is on or below the "L" line, add coolant up to the "F" line. (P. 480)
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant selection Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. U.S.A.: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C]) Canada: "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C]) For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing Visually check the radiators, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling systems.
CAUTION
When the hybrid system is hot Do not remove the engine coolant radiator cap and power control unit coolant reservoir cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
When adding coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
370
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
When the hybrid system is hot Do not touch the radiators or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
Brake fluid Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be 4 between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type Item
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid Clean funnel
STEP 1
Slide and lift up the rubber strip and clips to partly remove it as shown.
STEP 2
Disconnect the claws and remove the service cover.
STEP 3
Remove the reservoir cap.
STEP 4 Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
372
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
When filling the reservoir Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
If the fluid level is low or high
4
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If the amount of washer fluid is insufficient, add washer fluid.
CAUTION
When adding washer fluid Add washer fluid after the hybrid system has been stopped and cooled down sufficiently. Washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled inside a hot engine compartment.
NOTICE
Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.
Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
374
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
12-volt battery
Location
The 12-volt battery is located under the rear right seat.
Removing the 12-volt battery cover Remove the 12-volt battery cover after removing the clips.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Exterior Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps. Terminals Hold-down clamp
Installing the 12-volt battery cover Install the 12-volt battery cover with the clips.
376
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
When disconnecting the 12-volt battery terminals
Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.
After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
4
Start the hybrid system with the "POWER" switch in ACCESSORY mode.
The hybrid system may not start with the "POWER" switch turned off.
However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second
attempt.
The "POWER" switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the "POWER" switch mode to the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the "POWER" switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Chemicals in the 12-volt battery The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-volt battery: Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools. Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery. Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
When disconnecting the 12-volt battery terminals Always disconnect the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal is disconnected first and touches a surrounding metal surface it may cause sparks resulting in a fire or it may result in an electric shock, death or serious injury.
How to recharge the 12-volt battery Only perform a slow charge (3.5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.
378
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Emergency measures regarding electrolyte If electrolyte gets in your eyes Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility. If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately. If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary. If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
When replacing the 12-volt battery
4
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion. For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
When recharging the 12-volt battery Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
New tread Treadwear indicator Worn tread
Tire rotation
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or "" marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
Front
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 433)
380
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 382)
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: When rotating front and rear tires which have different tire inflation pressures
When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current 4 tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
How to initialize the tire pressure warning system STEP 1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch
(vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch (vehicles with a smart key system) off. Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving. STEP 2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (P. 498) Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 3 Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or "POWER" switch to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
STEP 4
Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.
STEP 5 Vehicles without a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the "ON" position and then turn the engine switch to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with the "POWER" switch in ON mode and then turn the "POWER" switch off.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.
When to replace your vehicle's tires Tires should be replaced if: You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
382
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
Low profile tires (vehicles with P195/50R16 tires) Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather 4 conditions.
Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 503)
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire types Summer tires Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires. All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving. Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 229)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
384
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times. After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.
Tire pressure warning system certification FCC ID: PAXPMVC010 U.S.A. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful 4 interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear. Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota. Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires). Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously. Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.
When initializing the tire pressure warning system Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
386
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 381)
Driving on rough roads
4
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.
Low profile tires (vehicles with P195/50R16 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sustaining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.
Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
Information Provided by:
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (P. 498)
388
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge
STEP 1 Remove the tire valve cap. STEP 2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. STEP 3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations. STEP 4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to 4 deflate. STEP 5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. STEP 6 Put the tire valve cap back on.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.
Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: Reduced fuel efficiency Reduced driving comfort and tire life Reduced safety Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: Check only when the tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading. Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving. Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
390
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury: Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires Poor sealing of the tire bead Wheel deformation and/or tire separation A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
4
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on. Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control. Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as "offset". Toyota does not recommend using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or types Used wheels Bent wheels that have been straightened Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped) Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
392
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 381)
CAUTION
When replacing wheels
Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
When installing the wheel nuts
4
Tapered portion
Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer. Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
394
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Replacement method
STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the "POWER" switch off.
STEP 2
Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.
STEP 3
4
Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the upper claws.
STEP 4
Pull out the glove box and disconnect the lower claws.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5
Remove the filter cover.
STEP 6
Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.
The "UP" mark shown on the filter should be pointing up.
Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".)
If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
396
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wireless remote control/electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items: Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)
Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart key system)
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
STEP 2
4
Remove the module.
Maintenance and care
STEP 3
Open the case cover using a coin protected with tape etc. and remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
Information Provided by:
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)
STEP 1
Take out the mechanical key.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Remove the depleted battery using a small flathead screwdriver.
Insert a new battery with the "+" terminal facing up.
398
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system) lithium battery
Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws. If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function properly.
The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
Removed battery and other parts
4
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: Always work with dry hands. Moisture may cause the battery to rust. Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the "POWER" switch off.
STEP 2 Open the fuse box cover. Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
Engine compartment (type B fuse box) Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
400
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Under the instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP 3 After a system failure, see "Fuse layout and amperage ratings" (P. 404) for details about which fuse to check.
STEP 4 Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 5 Check if the fuse is blown. Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
402
Information Provided by:
Type D Type E
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Normal fuse Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings Engine compartment (type A fuse box)
Fuse
1 EFI-MAIN
2 HORN 3 IG2 4 SPARE 5 SPARE 6 SPARE
7 EFI NO.2
8 H-LP RH-LO 9 H-LP LH-LO 10 H-LP RH-HI 11 H-LP LH-HI 404
Ampere
20 A
10 A 30 A 7.5 A 15 A 30 A
10 A
10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Circuit
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2
Horn
IG2 NO.2, METER, IGN
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Spare fuse
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
Right-hand headlight (low beam)
Left-hand headlight (low beam), gauge and meters
Right-hand headlight (high beam)
Left-hand headlight (high beam), gauge and meters
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
12 IG2 NO.2
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, steering switches, brake system, starter system, smart key system, occupant classification system, SRS airbag system
13 DOME
15 A
Audio system, vehicle control and operation data recording, main body ECU, personal lights, luggage compartment light
14 ECU-B NO.1
7.5 A Main body ECU, smart key system
15 METER
7.5 A Gauge and meters
16 IGN 17 HAZ
15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
10 A Emergency flashers
4
18 ETCS
10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
19 ABS NO.1
20 A Brake system
20 ENG W/PMP
30 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system
21 H-LP-MAIN
40 A
H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-LO, H-LP LH-HI, H-LP RH-HI, daytime running light system
22 H-LP CLN
30 A No circuit
23 ABS MTR NO.1
30 A Brake system
24 P/I
50 A EFI-MAIN, HORN, IG2
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse
25 ECU-B NO.2
26 AM2 27 STRG LOCK 28 ABS NO.2 29 IGCT-MAIN 30 D/C CUT 31 PTC HTR NO.1 32 PTC HTR NO.2 33 FAN 34 PTC HTR NO.3 35 DEF 36 DEICER 37 BATT FAN 38 IGCT NO.2 39 IGCT NO.4 40 PCU 41 IGCT NO.3 42 MIR HTR
Ampere
7.5 A
7.5 A 20 A 10 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
Circuit Air conditioning system, gauge and meters, occupant classification system, tire pressure warning system, starter system, smart key system, power door lock system Starter system Starter system Brake system IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3, IGCT NO.4, PCU, BATT FAN DOME, ECU-B NO.1 PTC heater PTC heater Electric cooling fan PTC heater MIR HTR, rear window defogger No circuit Battery cooling fan Hybrid system Hybrid system Hybrid system Hybrid system Outside rear view mirror defoggers
406
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment (type B fuse box)
Fuse
Ampere
Circuit
1 DC/DC
100 A Hybrid system
2 ABS MTR NO.2
30 A Brake system
4
3 HTR
40 A Air conditioning system
4 EPS
50 A Electric power steering system
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Under the driver's side instrument panel
Fuse 1 TAIL 2 PANEL 3 DOOR R/R 4 DOOR P
5 ECU-IG NO.1
6 ECU-IG NO.2 7 HTR-IG
8 GAUGE
9 WASHER 10 WIPER 11 WIPER RR 12 P/W 408
Ampere 10 A 5 A 20 A 20 A
5 A
5 A 7.5 A
10 A
15 A 25 A 15 A 30 A
Circuit
Parking lights, side marker lights, tail lights, license plate lights, front fog lights, gauge and meters
Instrument panel lights
Rear power window (right side)
Front power window (right side)
Rear window defogger, tire pressure warning system, main body ECU, brake system, vehicle stability control system, power door lock system, smart key system
Electric power steering system
Air conditioning system, PTC heater
Back-up lights, audio system, shift lock control system, moon roof, vehicle control and operation data recording, vehicle proximity notification system
Windshield wipers and washer
Windshield wipers and washer
Windshield wipers and washer
Power window
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse 13 DOOR R/L 14 DOOR D 15 CIG
16 ACC
17 D/L 18 OBD
19 STOP
20 AM1 21 FOG FR 22 S/ROOF 23 S/HTR
Ampere
Circuit
20 A Rear power window (left side)
20 A Front power window (left side)
15 A Power outlet
Main body ECU, audio system, out-
5 A
side rear view mirrors, shift lock
control system
25 A Power door lock system
7.5 A On-board diagnosis
7.5 A
Starter system, shift lock control system, vehicle proximity notification system, brake system, stop lights, high mounted stoplight
7.5 A Starter system
15 A Front fog lights
4
25 A Moon roof
15 A
Seat heaters, air conditioning system
After a fuse is replaced If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (P. 411)
If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury. Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse. Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix. This can cause extensive damage or even fire. Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
Fuse box near the power control unit Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring near the fuse box. Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
410
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement is carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 499)
Front bulb locations
Headlights (low beam)
Parking lights
Headlights (high beam) and daytime running lights
Front side marker lights
Front turn signal lights
4 Front fog lights (if equipped)
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal lights
Tail and rear side marker lights
License plate lights Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs
Headlights and daytime running lights
STEP 1
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
High beam and daytime running lights (inside) Low beam (outside)
412
Information Provided by:
STEP 2 STEP 3
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.
High beam and daytime running lights Low beam
Replace the light bulb, and install the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.
Maintenance and care
STEP 4
4
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights and daytime running lights and headlight low beams on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.
Front fog lights (if equipped)
STEP 1
Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the light to be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point that allows your hand to easily fit between the tire and fender liner.
Information Provided by:
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5
Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Install a new bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.
414
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6
Turn and secure the bulb. Install the connector.
Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the front fog light on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.
STEP 57 When installing the fender liner, install by conducting STEP 572 with the directions reversed.
Parking lights
STEP 1
Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.
4
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Front side marker lights
STEP 1
Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the light to be replaced.
Turn the steering wheel to a point that allows your hand to easily fit between the tire and fender liner.
416
Information Provided by:
STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the clips.
Partly remove the fender liner.
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
STEP 6 When installing the light bulb and bulb base, reverse the steps listed.
STEP 7
Installing the clips.
Front turn signal lights STEP 1 Partly remove the fender liner as described in STEP 1 and
STEP 2 of "Front fog lights". (P. 413)
STEP 2
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.
418
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear turn signal lights, tail and rear side marker lights, and back-up lights
STEP 1
Open the back door and remove the bolts. Pull the lamp assembly straight back to disengage the clip and 2 pins.
Where the clip attaches Pin
STEP 2
4
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Rear turn signal light Tail and rear side marker light Back-up light
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance STEP 3
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light Tail and rear side marker light Back-up light
STEP 4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.
License plate light
STEP 1
Remove the cover.
Insert a properly sized screwdriver into the hole of the cover, and pry off the cover as shown in the illustration.
To prevent damaging the vehicle, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with tape.
STEP 2
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.
420
Information Provided by:
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Lights other than the above If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.
Side turn signal lights Stop lights High mounted stoplight
LED light bulbs
The stop lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
4
Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
Water has built up inside the headlight.
Maintenance and care
Information Provided by:
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
Replacing light bulbs Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns. Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack. Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
422
Information Provided by:
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.
Emergency flashers If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not operating (while the "READY" indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may discharge.
424
Information Provided by:
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or flatbed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing. The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move. The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the 5 emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h). A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
425
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelet
STEP 1
Push the eyelet cover and then open it.
STEP 2 STEP 3
Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.
426
Information Provided by:
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
5
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
427
5-1. Essential information
Using a flatbed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
Before emergency towing STEP 1 Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" (hybrid system off) or "ON" (hybrid system operating) position.
Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the "POWER" switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON (hybrid system operating) mode.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
STEP 3 Release the parking brake.
Emergency towing eyelet location P. 457
428
Information Provided by:
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
Caution while towing
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
Do not turn the engine switch off (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch off (vehicles with a smart key system). This may lead to accidents because the steering wheel will be locked and you will not be able to operate the steering wheel.
If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
NOTICE
To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing 5 using a wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed. To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear. To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency towing
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
Information Provided by:
429
When trouble arises
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms Fluid leaks under the vehicle (Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
is shown on the multi-information display
Audible symptoms Changes in exhaust sound Excessive tire squeal when cornering Strange noises related to the suspension system Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
Operational symptoms Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly Appreciable loss of power Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
430
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light in red (warning buzzer)*
(U.S.A.) · Low brake fluid
· Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
(Canada) released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released the system is operating normally.
5
*: Brake system warning buzzer:
When there is a possible problem that could affect braking performance, the
warning light will come on and a warning buzzer will sound.
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: P. 444
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: · The hybrid system; · The electronic engine control system; or · The electronic throttle control system
SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The SRS airbag system; · The front passenger occupant classification system; or · The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: · The ABS; or · The brake assist system
432
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light (Comes on)
Warning light/Details
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
Slip indicator light Indicates a malfunction in: · Vehicle stability control; · Traction control; or · Hill-start assist control
Brake system warning light in yellow Indicates a malfunction in: · The regenerative brake system; or · The electronically controlled brake system
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Correction procedure
5
Low fuel level warning
light
Remaining fuel is low
When the remaining fuel
is approximately 1.2 gal. Refuel the vehicle.
(Flashes)
(4.7 L, 1.0 Imp. gal.) or less, a buzzer sounds
and the lowest segment
of the fuel gauge flashes
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light
Warning light/Details
Seat belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*
Warns the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belt
Master warning light A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction
Correction procedure Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the reminder light (warning buzzer) go off.
P. 441
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as · Natural causes (P. 436) · Flat tire (P. 457)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute: Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system (P. 437)
Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
434
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: Driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer:
The driver's and front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the "ON" or "START" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), "AIR BAG ON" indicator light, "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 432)
Front passenger detection sensor, passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning
buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
5
If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving The malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank cap becomes loose. If the fuel tank cap is loose, tighten it securely. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
When a tire is replaced with a spare tire The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.
436
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used
If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby
If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings
If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with 5 some types of tires.)
If tire chains are used
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable features P. 516) However, Toyota recommends that the seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passenger when seat belts are not fastened.
Information Provided by:
437
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When the electric power steering system warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately. If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer. Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
438
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the 5 level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
440
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:
Multi-information display
Warning message details and/ or correction procedures are shown on the multi-information display.
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning lights comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message
Details
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system A buzzer sounds in accordance with the warning message that is displayed.
Indicates that the high engine coolant temperature is too high
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure A buzzer also sounds. The warning message is shown if the engine oil pressure is too low.
442
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning message
Details
(Flashes) (If equipped)
· Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system · Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock sys-
tem A buzzer also sounds.
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control
system
5
A buzzer also sounds.
(If equipped)
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that one or more of the side doors is not fully closed
The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes
and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.
Make sure that all the side doors are closed.
Indicates that the back door is not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes
and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the back door is not yet fully closed.
Close the back door.
444
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
(Flashes) (If equipped)
Indicates that the moon roof is not fully closed (with the "POWER" switch off and the driver's door is open)
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
(U.S.A.)
Indicates that the parking brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5
km/h),
flashes
Release the parking brake.
(Canada) (red)
and a buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged.
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all
maintenance accord-
ing to the driven dis-
5
tance on the
maintenance sched-
ule*1 should be per-
formed soon
If necessary, perform maintenance.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message (U.S.A. only)
Details
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the main-
tenance schedule*1
Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the maintenance data has been reset (The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset)
Correction procedure
Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the maintenance data after the maintenance is performed.(P. 349)
Indicates that the hybrid system has overheated
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop and check. (P. 480)
(Flashes)
Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low
A buzzer also sounds.
When stopping the vehicle for a long period of time, shift the shift lever to P. The hybrid battery (traction battery) cannot be charged with the shift position in N.
446
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message (Flashes)
Details
Indicates that the hybrid battery (traction battery) power has dropped because a long period of time has elapsed after shifting the shift lever to N
A buzzer also sounds.
Correction procedure
Shift the shift lever to P and restart the hybrid system when starting the vehicle.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the driver's door was opened with the shift position in N, D or B
A buzzer also sounds.
Shift the shift lever to P.
(Flashes) (Flashes)
Indicates that the
accelerator pedal is
Release the accelera-
depressed while the tor pedal and shift the
shift position is in N shift lever to D, B or R.
A buzzer also sounds.
5
Indicates that the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or the "POWER" switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off (vehicles with a smart key system) and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn the lights off.
Information Provided by:
447
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message
Details
Correction procedure
Indicates that the EV drive mode is not
available*2
A buzzer also sounds. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the vehicle is idling, battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode operating speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.
Use the EV drive mode when it becomes available.
(Flashes 3 times)
Indicates that the EV drive mode has been automatically can-
celled*2
A buzzer also sounds. The reason the EV drive mode is not available (the battery charge is low, speed is higher than the EV drive mode speed range, accelerator pedal is depressed too much) may be displayed.
Drive the vehicle for a while.
*1: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's
Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
*2: For the EV drive mode operating conditions:
P. 170
448
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately. (vehicles with a smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off.
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Once
(Flashes)
Details
The electronic key is not detected when an attempt is made to start the hybrid system.
Correction procedure
Start the hybrid system with the electronic key present.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Once 3 times
(Flashes)
Details
The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver's door was opened and closed while the shift lever was in P without turning off the "POWER" switch.
The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and a door other than the driver's door was opened and closed while the "POWER" switch was in a mode other than off.
Correction procedure
Turn the "POWER" switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
450
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Details
Correction procedure
Continuous Once (For 5 seconds)
(Displayed alternately) (Flashes)
An attempt was made to lock the doors using the entry function after the electronic key was carried outside the vehicle without turning off the "POWER" switch.
Turn the "POWER" switch off and lock the doors again.
9 times
(Flashes)
An attempt was
made to start
the hybrid sys-
tem without the
electronic key
being present,
or the electronic key was
Confirm that the electronic key is 5
not functioning inside the vehi-
normally.
cle.
An attempt was
made to drive
when the regu-
lar key was not
inside the vehi-
cle.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Continuous
(Flashes)
Continuous Continuous
(Displayed alternately) (Flashes)
Details
The driver's door was opened while a shift lever position other than P was selected without turning off the "POWER" switch.
The electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver's door was opened and closed while a shift lever position other than P was selected without turning off the "POWER" switch.
Correction procedure
Shift the shift lever to P.
· Shift the shift lever to P.
· Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
452
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Details
Correction procedure
An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart key system while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.
Once Continuous
(Flashes)
An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside door
Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.
lock button into
the lock posi-
tion, and then
closing the door
while pulling on
the outside door
5
handle with the
electronic key
still inside the
vehicle.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior buzzer buzzer
Once
Once
454
Warning message (Flashes) (Flashes)
Details
Correction procedure
· The electronic key could not be detected when the "POWER" switch was pressed after the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key.
· The electronic key could not be detected two consecutive times when the "POWER" switch was pressed.
Touch the electronic key to the "POWER" switch while depressing the brake pedal.
An attempt was made to start the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P and start the hybrid system.
Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.
Next time when starting the hybrid system, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt-battery.
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Details
Correction procedure
Once
The electronic key has a low battery.
Replace the electronic key battery. (P. 397)
Once
(Flashes)
The driver's
door was
opened and
closed with the
"POWER"
switch turned off Press the
and then the
"POWER"
"POWER"
switch while
switch was put depressing the
in ACCES-
brake pedal.
SORY mode
twice without
the hybrid sys-
tem being
5
started.
During a hybrid system starting procedure in the event that the electronic key was not functioning properly (P. 473), the "POWER" switch was touched with the electronic key.
Press the "POWER" switch within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.
Information Provided by:
455
When trouble arises
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior Exterior Warning message
buzzer buzzer
Once
(Flashes)
Once
(Flashes)
Once
(Flashes)
Details
The steering lock could not be released within 3 seconds of the "POWER" switch being pressed.
Correction procedure
Press the "POWER" switch while depressing the brake pedal and moving the steering wheel left and right.
The "POWER" switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
After the "POWER" switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P.
Turn the "POWER" switch off.
456
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided. Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface. Set the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to P. Stop the hybrid system. Turn on the emergency flashers. Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Luggage floor cover
Jack
Spare tire
Spare wheel cushions
5
Tool bag*
*: Jack handle, wheel nut wrench and towing eyelet
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
STEP 1
Move the driver seat to the front most position.
STEP 2
Push the tabs in and remove the cover by pulling it towards you.
STEP 3
For tightening For loosening
458
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the compact spare tire
STEP 1
Remove the luggage floor cover by lifting up the points indicated by the arrows.
STEP 2
Remove the spare wheel cushions, then loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
STEP 1
STEP 2
Chock the tires.
Flat tire
Front
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Rear
Lefthand side
Righthand side
Wheel chock positions
Behind the rear righthand side tire
Behind the rear lefthand side tire
In front of the front right-hand side tire
In front of the front left-hand side tire
For vehicles with steel wheels, remove the wheel ornament using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament.
460
Information Provided by:
STEP 3
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).
When trouble arises
STEP 4
Turn the tire jack portion "A" by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
STEP 5 STEP 6
Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
5
Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.
Information Provided by:
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Installing the compact spare tire
STEP 1
Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.
STEP 2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel seat
When replacing a steel wheel with a compact spare tire, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel seat
When replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.
462
Information Provided by:
STEP 3
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Lower the vehicle.
When trouble arises
STEP 4
Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque: 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
STEP 5 Stow the tire jack and all tools.
STEP 6
Stow the flat tire in the luggage
compartment as shown in the
illustration.
5
STEP 7 Stow the spare wheel cushions and luggage floor cover in the luggage compartment.
Information Provided by:
463
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The compact spare tire The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency. Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 498)
After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 381)
When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires: STEP 1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire. STEP 2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle. STEP 3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.
464
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
When using the compact spare tire
Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
When storing the compact spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:
ABS & Brake assist
VSC
TRAC
5
EPS
Cruise control (if equipped)
Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
465
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury. Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains. Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle. Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by the jack. Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside. When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire. Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
466
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Replacing a flat tire Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns. Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving. Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. · Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels. · When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel. · If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer. · When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (P. 393)
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
467
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.
Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle. The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.
Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 381)
468
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting procedure is being followed. (P. 158, 162)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
Vehicles with a smart key system: The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 474)
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle. (P. 105)
Vehicles with immobilizer system: There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 110)
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Vehicles with a smart key system: The hybrid system may be
malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open
circuit or a blown fuse. However, depending on the type of
malfunction, an interim measure is available to start the hybrid
system. (P. 470)
5
The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 475)
The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
469
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem: One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected. The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 475)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the "POWER" switch is functioning normally: STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P. STEP 2 Set the parking brake. STEP 3 Turn the "POWER" switch to ACCESSORY mode. STEP 4 Press and hold the "POWER" switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal firmly. Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
470
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
STEP 1 Set the parking brake.
STEP 2 Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the "POWER" switch to ACCESSORY mode.
STEP 3 Depress the brake pedal.
STEP 4
Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
5
STEP 5
Press the shift lock override button.
The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
471
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles without a smart key system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles with a smart key system, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.
472
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted (P. 55) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors
Use the mechanical key (P. 44) in order to perform the following operations (driver's door only):
Unlocks the doors Locks all the doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again within 5 seconds unlocks the other doors.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
473
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the hybrid system
STEP 1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
STEP 2
Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the "POWER" switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the "POWER" switch will turn to ON mode.
STEP 3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that
is dis-
played on the multi-information display. STEP 4 Press the "POWER" switch. In the event that the "POWER" switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
Stopping the hybrid system Shift the shift lever to P and press the "POWER" switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.
Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 397)
If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.
When the electronic key does not work properly Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 54)
474
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the vehicle's 12-volt battery is discharged. You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
STEP 1
Remove the 12-volt battery cover under the rear right seat. (P. 375)
When trouble arises
STEP 2 5
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle. Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle. Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle. Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to the negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Information Provided by:
475
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
STEP 4 Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the "POWER" switch off.
STEP 5 Vehicles without a smart key system Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the "POWER" switch to ON mode.
STEP 6 Make sure the "READY" indicator comes on. If the indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP 7 Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
476
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off. Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
Precautions when the 12-volt battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart key system) In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system immediately after the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors. The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction. The "POWER" switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12volt battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12volt battery, turn the "POWER" switch off. If the "POWER" switch was in ACCESSORY or ON mode before the 12- 5 volt battery was discharged, the audio system and/or air conditioning system may operate when the 12-volt battery is reconnected.
Charging the 12-volt battery The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
477
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery: Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with anything other than the intended terminal. Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the "+" terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal. Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other. Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-volt battery.
After recharging the 12-volt battery Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
When replacing the 12-volt battery P. 379
478
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
12-volt battery precautions The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the 12-volt battery: When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body. Do not lean over the 12-volt battery. In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received. Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts. Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
479
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
is shown on the multi-information display:
The engine may be overheating.
The hybrid system overheat warning message is shown on the multi-information display: The power control unit may be overheating.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.
Correction procedures
If
is shown on the multi-information display:
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
STEP 2 Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area. If you see steam: Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system. If you do not see steam: Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3 Check to see if the cooling fans are operating. If the fans are operating:
Wait until
disappears and then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota dealer.
480
Information Provided by:
STEP 4 STEP 5
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
After the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently, check the engine coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Add engine coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable. (P. 494)
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
481
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system overheat warning message is shown on the multi-information display:
STEP 1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system.
STEP 2 Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
STEP 3 Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating: Wait until the hybrid overheat warning message disappears and then stop the hybrid system. If the message does not disappear, call your Toyota dealer.
If the fans are not operating: Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota dealer.
STEP 4
After the hybrid system has cooled down, check the power control unit coolant level and inspect the cooling system for leaks.
STEP 5
Add power control unit coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if power control unit coolant is unavailable. (P. 494)
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
482
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Overheating The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating: Hybrid system output decreases. Steam comes out from the engine area.
CAUTION
To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, causing serious injuries such as burns.
Check that
on the multi-information display and the "READY" indi-
cator are off.
For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline
engine automatically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to
operate. Do not touch or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans.
Doing so may lead to fingers, clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in
injury.
5
Do not loosen the radiator cap while the hybrid system and radiator are hot. Serious injuries, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
483
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
When adding engine/power control unit coolant Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power control unit coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precautions: Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.). When using coolant additives, use genuine Toyota products or equivalent.
484
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
STEP 1 Shift the shift lever to P and set the parking brake. Stop the hybrid system.
STEP 2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire. STEP 3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction. STEP 4 Restart the hybrid system. STEP 5 Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and carefully apply
the accelerator to free the vehicle.
CAUTION
When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
When shifting the shift lever
5
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
To avoid damage to the transmission and other components Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary. If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
485
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
STEP 1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
STEP 2 Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N STEP 3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road. STEP 4 Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
STEP 3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
STEP 4
Vehicles without a smart key system: Stop the hybrid system by turning the engine switch to the "ACC" position.
486
Information Provided by:
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
STEP 4
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more
Vehicles with a smart key system: To stop the hybrid system, press and hold the "POWER" switch for 3 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.
STEP 5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
CAUTION
If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system. Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
5
When trouble arises
Information Provided by:
487
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
488
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
Overall length Overall width
Overall height*1
Wheelbase
Tread
Front Rear
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)
*1: Unladen vehicles *2: P175/65R15 tires *3: P195/50R16 tires
157.3 in. (3995 mm)
66.7 in. (1695 mm)
Without moon roof 56.9 in. (1445 mm)
With moon roof 57.7 in. (1465 mm)
100.4 in. (2550 mm)
58.3 in. (1480 mm)*2 57.5 in. (1460 mm)*3 58.1 in. (1475 mm)*2 57.1 in. (1450 mm)*3
845 lb. (380 kg)
490
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle identification Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped under the front passenger's seat.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certi- 6 fication Label.
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
491
6-1. Specifications
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
Engine
Model Type Bore and stroke Displacement Valve clearance (engine cold)
1NZ-FXE
4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline 2.95 × 3.33 in. (75.0 × 84.7 mm) 91.3 cu.in. (1497 cm3) Intake: 0.006 0.010 in. (0.15 0.25 mm) Exhaust: 0.010 0.014 in. (0.25 0.35 mm)
Fuel
Fuel type Octane rating Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
Unleaded gasoline only 87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
9.5 gal. (36 L, 7.9 Imp. gal.)
Electric motor (Traction motor)
Type Maximum output Maximum torque
Permanent magnet synchronous motor 45 kW 125 ft·lbf (169 N·m, 17.2 kgf·m)
492
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Hybrid battery (Traction battery)
Type Voltage Capacity Quantity Overall voltage
Nickel-metal hydride battery 7.2 V/module 6.5 Ah (3HR) 20 modules 144 V
Lubrication system
Oil capacity (Drain and refill reference*) Without filter With filter
3.6 qt. (3.4 L, 3.0 Imp.qt.) 3.9 qt. (3.7 L, 3.3 Imp.qt.)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Engine oil selection
"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
6
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
Outside temperature
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.
Information Provided by:
493
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example): · The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather. · The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label: The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Cooling system
Capacity Gasoline engine Power control unit
Coolant type
494
5.6 qt. (5.3 L, 4.7 Imp. qt.) 1.7 qt. (1.6 L, 1.4 Imp. qt.) Use either of the following:
· "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" · A similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology Do not use plain water alone.
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Ignition system
Spark plug Make Gap
DENSO FK16R-A8 0.03 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
Electrical system
12-volt battery Open voltage* at 68°F (20°C):
Fully charged Half charged Discharged
Charging rates
12.5 V or over 11.0 12.5 V Under 11.0 V (*: Voltage checked 20 minutes after the hybrid system and all the lights are turned off)
3.5 A or less (Recharge within 10 hours)
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
495
6-1. Specifications
Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity*
3.5 qt. (3.3 L, 2.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, con-
tact your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
Transmission fluid type Using transmission fluid other than "Toyota Genuine ATF WS" may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of the transmission accompanied by vibration and, ultimately, damage to the vehicle's transmission.
496
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
Pedal clearance*1
2.8 in. (70 mm) Min.
Pedal free play
0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit
0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Brake lining wear limit
Parking brake lever travel*2
0.04 in. (1.0 mm) 8 11 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf).
Steering
Free play
Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
497
6-1. Specifications
Tires and wheels 15-inch tires
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size Wheel nut torque
P175/65R15 84H, T125/70D16 96M (spare)
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
15 × 5J, 16 × 4T (spare)
76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
16-inch tires Tire size
Front and rear tire inflation pressure (recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size Wheel nut torque
P195/50R16 83V, T125/70D16 96M (spare)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 29 psi (200 kPa, 2.0 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar) Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
16 × 6J, 16 × 4T (spare)
76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)
498
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs
Bulb No
W
Type
Headlights Low beam High beam
9704
55
A
9005
60
B
Parking lights
5
D
Front turn signal lights Front fog lights*1
21
E
19
C
Exterior
Tail and rear side marker lights
5
D
License plate lights
5
D
Back-up lights Side turn signal lights
16
D
5
E*2
Front side marker lights
5
D
Rear turn signal lights
21
E
Interior lights/personal lights
5
D
Interior
Luggage compartment light
5
D
*1: If equipped
*2: Side turn signal lights should be replaced as an assembly.
6
A: H11 halogen bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: H16 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
499
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle. Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
Gasoline quality standards Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide. The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits. All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/ or keep clean intake systems.
500
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).
Vehicle specifications
If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
6
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
Information Provided by:
501
6-1. Specifications
If your engine knocks Consult your Toyota dealer. You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
Notice on fuel quality Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged. Do not use leaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction. Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems. Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
Fuel-related poor driveability If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
502
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Information Provided by:
6 503
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
(P. 506)
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.
Summer tires or all season tires
(P. 384)
An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.
Location of treadwear indicators
(P. 380)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(P. 505)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 383)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(P. 498)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows.
"TEMPORARY USE ONLY"
(P. 464)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
504
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identification mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
505
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire dimensions
Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 digits or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
Section width Tire height Wheel diameter
506
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Tire section names
Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
6
DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
507
6-1. Specifications
Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
508
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
509
6-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Cold tire inflation pressure Maximum inflation pressure Recommended inflation pressure
Accessory weight
Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Normal occupant weight Occupant distribution
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below
510
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined 6 by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Information Provided by:
511
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Bead separation Bias ply tire Carcass Chunking Cord Cord separation Cracking
CT
Extra load tire Groove Innerliner Innerliner separation
Meaning
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
512
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Meaning
Intended outboard sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
inflation pressure
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter Overall width
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
6
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Information Provided by:
513
Vehicle specifications
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Ply separation Pneumatic tire Radial ply tire Reinforced tire Section width Sidewall Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim
Meaning
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
514
Information Provided by:
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Tread
Tread rib Tread separation Treadwear indicators (TWI)
Wheel-holding fixture
Meaning
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of
occupants 2 through 4 5 through 10
11 through 15
16 through 20
Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2
2 in front
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second
5
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
6
2 in front, 2 in second
7
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
515
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer. Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
Customizable Features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed using the Display Audio system (For further information on customizing settings using the Display Audio system, refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".) Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, -- = Not available
516
Information Provided by:
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default set- Customized
ting
setting
Operation sig-
nal (Emergency
On
flashers)
Off
--
O
Operation sig-
nal
On
(Buzzer)
Off
--
O
Operation buzzer volume
Level 7 Off to level 7 O
O
Smart key
system*1
and wire-
Time elapsed before automatic door lock
30 seconds
less remote control
function is activated if door is
60 seconds
--
O
(P. 47, 61)
not opened after being
120 seconds
unlocked
Open door warning buzzer
On
Off
--
O
Automatic door
lock function to
be activated if door is not
On
opened after
being unlocked
Off
--
O
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
517
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default set- Customized
ting
setting
Smart key
system*1
(P. 47)
Smart key system
Number of permissible times of continuous smart lock
On Twice
Off
--
O
Unlimited --
O
Wireless remote control
On
Off
--
O
Wireless remote control (P. 61)
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one step, all
doors unlocked in
All doors unlocked in one step.
O
O
two steps
Panic function
On
Off
--
O
518
Information Provided by:
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default set- Customized
ting
setting
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one step, all
doors unlocked in
All doors unlocked in one step.
--
O
two steps
Speed-detect-
ing automatic door lock func-
Off
tion*3
Door lock (P. 65)
Opening driver's door unlocks all
Off
doors
On
O
O
On
--
O
Shifting gears
to P unlocks all
On
doors.
Off
O
O
Shifting gears
to position other than P
On
locks all doors.
Off
O
O
Daytime run-
Lights (P. 202)
ning light system (except
On
Canada)
Off
O
O
6
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
519
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default set- Customized
ting
setting
Time elapsed
7.5 seconds --
O
before lights
15 seconds
turn off
30 seconds --
O
Operation
when the doors
On
are unlocked
Off
--
O
Operation after
the engine
switch is turned
On
Illumination (P. 318)
to the "LOCK"
position*2
Operation after
the "POWER" switch is turned
On
off*3
Off
--
O
Off
--
O
Operation
when you
approach the
vehicle with the
On
electronic key
on your per-
son*3
Off
--
O
Seat belt reminder (P. 433)
Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer
On
Off
--
O
520
Information Provided by:
6-2. Customization
Item
Function
Default set- Customized
ting
setting
Automatic
air condi- Air condition-
tioning sys- ing control of
On
tem
Eco drive mode
(P. 236)
Off
--
O
*1: If equipped *2: Vehicles without a smart key system *3: Vehicles with a smart key system
Vehicle specifications
Information Provided by:
6 521
6-2. Customization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
Item Maintenance data (except Canada)
Tire pressure warning system
When to initialize
Reference
After the maintenance is performed P. 349
· When rotating the tires on vehicles with differing front and rear tire inflation pressures
· When changing tire pressure (such as when changing traveling speed, load weight, etc.)
· When changing the tire size
P. 381
522
Information Provided by:
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
524
Information Provided by:
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le plus droit possible et calezvous bien dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
7
For owners
Information Provided by:
525
ATTENTION
Lorsque vous utilisez ou rangez la ceinture de sécurité du siège central arrière
N'utilisez pas la ceinture de sécurité du siège arrière central lorsque l'une des boucles est détachée. Si vous n'attachez qu'une des boucles, il y a risque de blessures graves voire mortelles en cas de freinage brusque ou de collision.
Entretien et soin
Ceintures de sécurité Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède. Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
526
Information Provided by:
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual. See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.
Airbags SRS frontaux
Airbag conducteur/airbag passager avant SRS Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs avec les éléments de l'habitacle.
Airbag SRS genoux du conducteur
Participent à la protection du conducteur.
7
Information Provided by:
527
For owners
Airbags SRS latéraux et rideau Airbags SRS latéraux avant Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis aux places avant. Airbags SRS rideau Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants assis aux places extérieures.
Autres airbags SRS Airbags SRS de coussin de siège Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant.
528
Information Provided by:
Composition du système d'airbag SRS
Airbags rideau Témoin d'alerte SRS et témoins indicateurs "AIR BAG ON" et "AIR BAG OFF" Airbags latéraux Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière) Airbag coussin de siège du passager avant Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité passager avant Airbag conducteur Contacteur de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur Airbag coussin de siège du conducteur
Information Provided by:
Capteurs d'impact latéral
(avant)
Prétensionneurs
de
ceinture de sécurité et
limiteurs d'effort
Capteurs d'impact latéral (porte avant)
Airbag de genoux du
conducteur
Système de classification
de l'occupant du siège
passager avant (ECU et
7
capteurs)
Boîtier d'airbag
électronique
Capteurs d'impact avant
Airbag passager avant
529
For owners
Votre véhicule est équipé de SACS DE SÉCURITÉ GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS (ADVANCED AIRBAGS) conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des sacs de sécurité gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
530
Information Provided by:
ATTENTION
Précautions avec les airbag SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les airbags SRS. Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécurité correctement. Les airbags SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux ceintures de sécurité.
L'airbag SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se trouve très près de l'airbag. L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis, la NHTSA (National Highway Traffic Safety Administration) conseille:
Sachant que la zone de danger pour l'airbag conducteur se trouve dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d'une marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre airbag conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de différentes façons:
· Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales.
· Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
· Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter l'airbag en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête 7 et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.
For owners
Information Provided by:
531
ATTENTION
Précautions avec les airbag SRS
Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les airbags SRS frontaux détectent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors même que ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce cas, il se peut que les airbags SRS frontaux ne se déploient pas correctement en cas d'accident, et vous risquez d'être tué ou grièvement blessé. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
L'airbag SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une violence considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager avant se trouve très près de l'airbag. Éloignez le siège passager avant au maximum de l'airbag et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis bien droit dans le siège.
Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un airbag. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient installés sur le siège arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège passager avant.
N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur "AIR BAG OFF" est allumé. En cas d'accident, le déploiement de l'airbag passager avant et de l'airbag de coussin de siège du côté passager avant est si rapide et violent que l'enfant risquerait d'être blessé grièvement, voire mortellement, si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège passager avant.
532
Information Provided by:
ATTENTION Précautions avec les airbag SRS
Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de bord.
Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant l'airbag SRS passager avant ou bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.
Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.
Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller sur le siège passager en appui contre la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
7
For owners
Information Provided by:
533
ATTENTION
Précautions avec les airbag SRS
Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la planche de bord, la garniture du volant de direction et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord. Au déploiement des airbags SRS conducteur et passager avant et de l'airbag de genoux du conducteur, ces objets risquent de se transformer en projectiles.
Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre de pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.
Véhicules dépourvus de système d'accès et de démarrage "mains libres": Évitez d'attacher au porte-clés de la clé de contact des objets lourds, pointus ou très durs, comme d'autres clés par exemple. Ces objets risquent d'entraver le déploiement de l'airbag SRS de genoux du conducteur ou d'être projetés vers le siège conducteur par la force de déploiement, constituant ainsi un danger potentiel.
Ne suspendez aux crochets à vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun objet dur. En cas de déploiement des airbags rideau SRS, tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Si un cache en vinyle recouvre la partie où l'airbag SRS de genoux du conducteur se déploie, veillez à l'enlever.
534
Information Provided by:
ATTENTION
Précautions avec les airbag SRS
N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de déploiement des airbags SRS latéraux et des airbags SRS de coussin de siège, car il risquerait d'en gêner le déploiement. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les airbags latéraux et airbags de coussin de siège de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le dispositif ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des airbags latéraux et de coussin de siège, entraînant la mort ou des blessures graves.
Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones renfermant les composants des airbag SRS. En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des airbags SRS.
Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le déclenchement (gonflage) des airbags SRS, car ils sont alors encore très chauds.
Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des airbags SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
Si les parties renfermant les airbags SRS, telles que la garniture du volant et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, sont abîmées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.
Ne rien disposer sur le siège du passager avant, comme par exemple un coussin. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. Il en résulte que l'airbags SRS frontal du passager avant risque de ne pas se déployer en cas d'accident.
7
For owners
Information Provided by:
535
ATTENTION
Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système d'airbag SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications suivantes. Les airbags SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se déployer (gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des airbags SRS.
Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garniture, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou des rails latéraux de toit.
Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-choc avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle.
Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle ou pare-kangourou, etc.).
Modification du système de suspension du véhicule.
Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur ou d'un lecteur CD.
Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique.
536
Information Provided by:
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 457 If you have a flat tire
The hybrid system does not start
P. 469 If the hybrid system will not start P. 110 Immobilizer system
If the vehicle 12-volt battery is disP. 475 charged
The shift lever cannot be moved out
If the shift lever cannot be shifted P. 471 from P
The engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or comes on
Steam can be seen coming from under the hood
P. 480 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 472 If you lose your keys
The 12-volt battery runs out
If the vehicle 12-volt battery is disP. 475 charged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 65 Side doors P. 71 Back door
The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand
P. 485 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light comes on
P. 431
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
550
Information Provided by:
What to do if...
Warning lights
Brake system warning light or (red indicator)
P. 431
Charging system warning
light
P. 432
Malfunction indicator lamp or
P. 432
SRS warning light P. 432
ABS warning light
or P. 432
*: Slip indicator comes on.
Electric power steering system
warning light
P. 432
Slip indicator light* P. 432
Brake system warning light (yellow indicator) P. 432
Low fuel level warning light
P. 433
Driver's and front passenger's seat belt reminder light P. 433
Master warning light P. 433
Tire pressure warning
light
P. 433
Information Provided by:
551
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever P. 360
Fuel filler door P. 105
Hood lock release lever Fuel filler door opener Tire inflation pressure
P. 360
P. 105
P. 498
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation pressure Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill reference)
Engine oil type
9.5 gal. (36 L, 7.9 Imp. gal.)
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
P. 498
Without filter With filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.) 3.6 (3.4, 3.0) 3.9 (3.7, 3.3)
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent Oil grade:
ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 0W-20
P. 493
552
Information Provided by:
Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows)